Trane Intellipak Rt Svx10c En User Manual

®
Installation  
Operation  
RT-SVX10C-EN  
Maintenance  
Library  
Service Literature  
Unitary  
Product Section  
Product  
Rooftop Air Conditioning (Comm. SZ, 20 - 130 Tons)  
SAH_, SEH_, SFH_, SLH_, SSH_, SXH_  
Installation/Operation/Maintenance  
10C  
Model  
Literature Type  
Sequence  
Date  
January 2005  
File No.  
SV-UN-RT-RT-SVX10C-EN-01-05  
RT-SVX10C-EN 11/04  
Supersedes  
INTELLIPAK™  
Commercial Single-Zone Rooftop Air  
Conditioners with CV or VAV Controls  
Models  
"5" and later Design Sequence  
SAHF -C20, -C25, -C30, -C40, -C50, -C55, -C60, -C70, -C75  
SEHF -C20, -C25, -C30, -C40, -C50, -C55, -C60, -C70, -C75  
SFHF -C20, -C25, -C30, -C40, -C50, -C55, -C60, -C70, -C75  
SLHF -C20, -C25, -C30, -C40, -C50, -C55, -C60, -C70, -C75  
SSHF -C20, -C25, -C30, -C40, -C50, -C55, -C60, -C70, -C75  
SXHF -C20, -C25, -C30, -C40, -C50, -C55, -C60, -C70, -C75  
- Units whose model numbers  
have a "1" in digit 20 are certified  
by Underwriters Labortory.  
"X" and later Design Sequence  
SXHG -C90, -D11, -D12, -D13 SEHG -C90, -D11, -D12, -D13  
SFHG -C90, -D11, -D12, -D13 SLHG -C90, -D11, -D12, -D13  
SSHG -C90, -D11, -D12, -D13  
- Units whose model numbers  
have a "2" in digit 20 are certified  
by the Canadian Standards  
Association (CSA).  
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and  
reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. Only  
qualified technicians should perform the installation and servicing of  
equipment referred to in this publication.  
With 3-DTM Scroll Compressors  
© 2004 American Standard Inc. All rights reserved  
Table of Contents  
Section One  
Section Four  
About The Manual ...............................................................2  
Literature Change History ................................................2  
Overview of Manual .........................................................2  
Unit Start-Up ......................................................................55  
Cooling Sequence of Operation ....................................55  
Gas Heating Sequence of Operation.............................56  
Fenwal Ignition System ..................................................56  
Honeywell Ignition System.............................................56  
Modulating Gas Sequence of Operation .......................57  
Flame Failure .................................................................57  
Electric Heat Sequence of Operation ............................58  
Wet Heat Sequence of Operation ..................................58  
Electrical Phasing ..........................................................59  
Voltage Supply and Voltage Imbalance .........................60  
Service Test Guide for Component Operation...............61  
Verifying Proper Fan Rotation .......................................63  
If all of the fans are rotating backwards;........................63  
System Airflow Measurements ......................................63  
Constant Volume Systems.............................................63  
Variable Air Volume Systems .........................................65  
Exhaust Airflow Measurement .......................................66  
TraqTM Sensor Airflow Measurement............................ 66  
Economizer Damper Adjustment ................................. 80  
Compressor Start-Up ................................................... 82  
Compressor Operational Sounds ................................ 83  
Thermostatic Expansion Valves ................................... 93  
Charging by Subcooling .............................................. 93  
Low Ambient Dampers ................................................. 93  
Electric, Steam and Hot Water Start-Up ...................... 94  
Gas Furnace Start-Up .................................................. 94  
Two Stage Gas Furnace ............................................... 95  
Full Modulating Gas Furnace ....................................... 97  
Limited Modulating Gas Furnace ................................ 98  
Final Unit Checkout ...................................................... 99  
Section Two  
General Information .............................................................4  
Model Number Description ..............................................4  
Hazard Identification ........................................................6  
Commonly Used Acronyms .............................................6  
Unit Description................................................................6  
Input Devices & System Functions ..................................8  
Constant Volume & Variable Air Volume Units ................8  
Constant Volume (CV) Units ..........................................10  
Variable Air Volume (VAV) Units .................................... 11  
Space Temperature Averaging .......................................12  
Unit Control Modules (UCM) ..........................................12  
Section Three  
Installation..........................................................................14  
Unit Inspection ...............................................................14  
Storage ...........................................................................14  
Unit Clearances .............................................................14  
Unit Dimensions & Weight Information ..........................14  
Roof Curb and Ductwork ...............................................22  
Pitch Pocket Location ....................................................23  
Unit Rigging & Placement ..............................................23  
General Unit Requirements ...........................................25  
Main Electrical Power Requirements.............................25  
Field Installed Control Wiring.........................................25  
Requirements for Electric Heat Units ............................25  
Requirements for Gas Heat ...........................................25  
Requirements for Hot Water Heat (SLH_) .....................25  
Requirements for Steam Heat (SSH_) ..........................26  
O/A Pressure Sensor and Tubing Installation ...............26  
Condensate Drain Connection.......................................27  
Shipping Fasteners ........................................................27  
O/A Sensor & Tubing Installation ...................................31  
Units with Statitrac™; ....................................................31  
Gas Heat Units (SFH_) ..................................................32  
Connecting the Gas Supply Line to the Furnace  
Section Five  
Service & Maintenance....................................................100  
Fan Belt Adjustment .....................................................104  
Scroll Compressor Replacement .................................105  
VFD Programming Parameters ...................................106  
Monthly Maintenance ...................................................107  
Filters............................................................................107  
Cooling Season ............................................................107  
Heating Season............................................................108  
Coil Cleaning ................................................................108  
Final Process .............................................................. 109  
Index ........................................................................... 111  
Warranty ..................................................................... 114  
Gas Train........................................................................32  
Flue Assembly Installation .............................................34  
Hot Water Heat Units (SLH_) ........................................34  
Steam Heat Units (SSH_) ..............................................35  
Disconnect Switch External Handle...............................38  
Electric Heat Units (SEH_) ............................................38  
Main Unit Power Wiring .................................................38  
Disconnect Switch Sizing (DSS)....................................44  
Field Installed Control Wiring.........................................45  
Controls using 24 VAC ...................................................45  
Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs.......................45  
Constant Volume System Controls ................................45  
Variable Air Volume System Controls ............................46  
Constant Volume or Variable Air Volume System  
Controls ..........................................................................46  
3
General Information  
Model Number Description  
All products are identified by a multiple character model  
number listed on the unit nameplate. An explanation of the  
alphanumeric identification code is provided below. Its use  
can define the unit's specific components, type of applica-  
tion, i.e. CV or VAV, for a particular unit.  
When ordering replacement parts or requesting service, be  
sure to refer to the specific model number, serial number,  
and DL number (if applicable) stamped on the unit name-  
plate.  
Sample Model No.:  
Digit No.:  
S X H F - C20 4 0 A  
1 2 3 4 5,6,7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21+  
1
0
A
1
5
B
1
D
0
1
A,R,L,etc.  
Digit 1 - Unit Type  
S = Self-Contained  
Digit 10 - Design Sequence  
3 = Disconnect Redesign  
Note: Sequence may be any letter  
A thru Z, or any digit 1 thru 9.  
Digit 17 - System Control  
1 = CV Control (Zone Control)  
2 = VAV-(S/A Temp Control  
without Inlet Guide Vanes)  
3 = VAV-(S/A Temp Control  
with Inlet Guide Vanes)  
4 = Space Pressure Control with Exhaust VFD  
without Bypass  
5 = Space Pressure Control with Exhaust VFD  
Digit 2 - Unit Function  
A = DX Cooling, No Heat  
E = DX Cooling, Electric Heat  
F = DX Cooling, Natural Gas Heat  
L = DX Cooling, Hot Water Heat  
S = DX Cooling, Steam Heat  
Digit 11 - Exhaust Option  
0 = None  
1 = Barometric  
2 = 100% - 1.5 HP*  
3 = 100% - 3 HP*  
4 = 100% - 5 HP*  
5 = 100% - 7.5 HP*  
6 = 100% - 10 HP*  
X = DX Cooling, Extended Casings  
# = DX Cooling, Propane Gas Heat  
and Bypass  
6 = VAV Supply Air Temperature Control  
with VFD w/o Bypass  
7 = VAV Supply Air Temperature Control  
Digit 3 - Unit Airflow  
H = Single-Zone  
7 = 100% - 15 HP*  
8 = 100% - 20 HP*  
A = 50% - 1.5 HP  
with VFD and Bypass  
8 = Supply and Exhaust Fan with VFD  
without Bypass  
Digit 4 - Development Sequence  
F = Sixth  
B = 50% - 3 HP  
9 = Supply and Exhaust Fan with VFD  
and Bypass  
C = 50% - 5 HP  
D = 50% - 7.5 HP  
E = 100% - 1.5 HP**  
F = 100% - 3 HP**  
G = 100% - 5 HP**  
H = 100% - 7.5 HP**  
J = 100% - 10 HP**  
K = 100% - 15 HP**  
L = 100% - 20 HP**  
Digits 5, 6, 7 - Nominal Capacity  
C20 = 20 Tons C55 = 55 Tons  
C25 = 25 Tons C60 = 60 Tons  
C30 = 30 Tons C70 = 70 Tons  
C40 = 40 Tons C75 = 75 Tons  
C50 = 50 Tons  
Digit 18 - Accessory Panel  
0 = None  
A = BAYSENS008*  
B = BAYSENS010*  
C = BAYSENS013*  
D = BAYSENS014*  
E = BAYSENS019*  
F = BAYSENS020*  
G = BAYSENS021*  
Digit 8 - Power Supply  
4 = 460/60/3 XL  
5 = 575/60/3 XL  
E = 200/60/3 XL  
# = 50% w/ Statitrac  
* w/Statitrac  
** w/o Statitrac (CV only)  
F = 230/60/3 XL  
Digit 19 - Ambient Control  
0 = Standard  
Note: SEHF units (unit with  
electric heat) utilizing 208V or  
230V require dual power source.  
Digit 12 - Exhaust Fan Drive  
0 = None  
8 = 800 PRM  
9 = 900 RPM  
A = 1000 RPM  
B = 1100 RPM  
1 = 0 Degree Fahrenheit  
4 = 400 RPM  
5 = 500 RPM  
6 = 600 RPM  
7 = 700 RPM  
Digit 20 - Agency Approval  
0 = None (UL Gas Heater, see note)  
1 = UL  
Digit 9 - Heating Capacity  
2 = CSA  
Note: When the second digit  
calls for "F" (Gas Heat), the  
following values apply:  
Additionally, please note G and  
M available ONLY on 50 Ton  
models and above.  
Digit 13 - Filter Type  
A = Throwaway  
B = Cleanable Wire Mesh  
C = High-Efficiency Throwaway  
D = Bag with Prefilters  
Note: Includes UL clsssified gas heating  
section only when second digit of  
Model No. is a "F".  
Digits 21 - 38 - Miscellaneous  
21 A = Unit Disconnect Switch  
22 B = Hot Gas Bypass  
H = High Heat - 2 Stage  
L = Low Heat - 2 Stage  
E = Cartridge with Prefilters  
F = No Filters (T/A Rack Only)  
0 = No Heat  
J = Limited Modulating High Heat  
G = No Filters (Bag/Cart. Rack Only)  
23 C = Economizer Control w/Comparative  
Enthalpy  
G = Limited Modulating Low Heat  
P = Full Modulating High Heat  
M = Full Modulating Low Heat  
23 Z = Economizer Control w/Reference  
Digit 14 - Supply Fan Horsepower  
1 = 3.0 HP 6 = 20.0 HP  
Enthalpy  
2 = 5.0 HP 7 = 25.0 HP  
23 W = Economizer Control w/Dry Bulb  
23 O = None W/O Economizer  
3 = 7.5 HP 8 = 30.0 HP  
4 = 10.0 HP 9 = 40.0 HP1  
5 = 15.0 HP  
Note: When the second digit  
24 E = Low Leak Fresh Air Dampers  
25 F = High Duct Temperature Thermostat  
calls for "E" (electric heat), the  
following values apply:  
D = 30 KW  
H = 50 KW  
R = 130 KW  
U = 150 KW  
26 G = High Capacity Evaporator Coil  
27 H = Copper Fins (Cond. only)  
Digit 15 - Supply Fan Drive  
L = 70 KW  
N = 90 KW  
Q = 110 KW  
Note: When the second digit calls  
"L" (Hot Water) or "S" (Steam)  
Heat, one of the following valve  
size values must be in Digit 9:  
High Heat Coil: 1 = 50", 2 = .75",  
V = 170 KW  
W = 190 KW  
5 = 500 RPM  
6 = 600 RPM  
7 = 700 RPM  
8 = 800 RPM  
9 = 900 RPM  
A = 1000 RPM  
B = 1100 RPM  
C = 1200 RPM  
D = 1300 RPM  
E = 1400 RPM  
F = 1500 RPM  
G = 1600 RPM  
28 K = Generic B.A.S. Module  
29 L = High-Efficiency Motors (Supply & Exhaust)  
30 M = Remote Human Interface  
31 N = Ventilation Override Module  
32 R = Extended Grease Lines  
33 T = Access Doors  
34 V = Interprocessor Communications Bridge  
35 0 = No communication module  
Digit 16 - Fresh Air Section  
A = No Fresh Air  
B = 0-25% Manual  
3 = 1", 4 = 1.25", 5 = 1.5", 6 = 2".  
Low Heat Coil: A = .50", B = .75",  
C = 1", D = 1.25", E = 1.5", F = 2".  
35 Y = Trane Communication Interface Module  
35 7 = LonTalk® Communication Interface Module  
36 8 = Spring Isolators  
D = 0-100% Economizer  
37 6 = Factory-Powered 15A GFI Convenience  
Outlet  
38 0 = None  
1. Available as standard 460 volt only for 70 and 75 ton models.  
4
Sample Model No.: S X H G - D 1 1 4 0 A  
H
7
C G  
8
D 1  
0
0
1 AT,etc  
Digit No.:  
1 2  
3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21+  
Digit 1 - Unit Type  
S = Self-Contained  
Digit 12 - Exhaust Air Fan Drive  
0 = None  
Digit 18 - Accessory Panel  
0 = None  
5 = 500 RPM  
6 = 600 RPM  
A = BAYSENS008*  
B = BAYSENS010*  
Digit 2 - Unit Function(s)  
E = DX Cooling, Electric Heat  
F = DX Cooling, Natural Gas Heat  
L = DX Cooling, Hot Water Heat  
S = DX Cooling, Steam Heat  
7 = 700 RPM  
8 = 800 RPM  
C = BAYSENS013*  
D = BAYSENS014*  
E = BAYSENS019*  
F = BAYSENS020*  
Digit 13 - Filter  
X = DX Cooling, Extended Casings  
A = Throwaway  
G = BAYSENS021*  
C = High-Efficiency Throwaway  
D = Bag with Prefilter  
Digit 3 - Unit Airflow  
Digit 19 - Ambient Control  
H = Single-Zone  
E = Cartridge with Prefilter  
F = Throwaway Filter Rack Less Filter  
Media  
0 = Standard  
Digit 4 - Development Sequence  
Digit 20 - Agency Approval  
G = Seventh  
G = Bag Filter Rack Less Filter Media  
0 = None (UL Gas Heater See Note 1)  
1 = UL  
2 = CSA  
Digits 5, 6, 7 - Nominal Capacity  
C90 = 90 Tons  
D11 = 105 Tons  
Digit 14 - Supply Air Fan HP  
C = 30 HP (2-15 HP)  
D = 40 HP (2-20 HP)  
Note: Includes UL classified gas  
heating section only when second  
digit of Model No. is a "F".  
D12 = 115 Tons  
E = 50 HP (2-25 HP)  
D13 = 130 Tons  
F = 60 HP (2-30 HP)  
G = 80 HP (2-40 HP)  
Digits 21 - 36 - Miscellaneous  
21 A = Unit Disconnect Switch  
22 B = Hot Gas Bypass  
23 C = Economizer Control  
with Comparative Enthalpy  
23 Z = Economizer Control  
with Reference Enthalpy  
23 W = Economizer Control w/Dry Bulb  
23 0 = None W/O Economizer  
24 E = Low-Leak Fresh Air Dampers  
25 F = High Duct Temperature Thermostat  
26 G = High Capacity Evaporator  
Coil (90 - 105 Only)  
27 K = Generic BAS Module  
28 L = High Efficiency Motors  
(Supply and Exhaust)  
Digit 8 Power Supply  
4 = 460/60/3 XL  
Digit 15 - Supply Air Fan Drive  
A = 1000 RPM  
B = 1100 RPM  
C = 1200 RPM  
D = 1300 RPM  
E = 1400 RPM  
5 = 575/60/3 XL  
E = 200/60/3 XL  
F = 230/60/3 XL  
Digit 9 - Heating Capacity  
0 = No Heat  
H = High Heat - 2 Stage  
J = Limited Modulating High Heat  
P = Full Modulating High Heat  
Note: When the second digit calls  
for "E" (electric heat), the following  
values apply in the ninth digit:  
W=190 kw  
F = 1500 RPM  
G = 1600 RPM  
Digit 16 - Fresh Air  
D = 0-100% Economizer (Std.)  
Digit 17 - System Control  
1 = Constand Volume Control  
2 = VAV Supply Air Temperature  
Control without Inlet Guide Vanes  
3 = VAV - Supply Air Temperature  
Control with Inlet Guide Vanes  
4 = Space Pressure Control with  
Exhaust VFD w/o Bypass  
29 M = Remote Human Interface  
30 N = Ventilation Override Module  
31 R = Extended Grease Lines  
32 T = Access Doors  
33 V = Inter-processor Communication  
Bridge  
34 0 = No communication module  
34 Y = Trane Communication Interface Module  
34 7 = LonTalk® Communication Interface Module  
Note: When the second digit calls for  
"L" or "S", one of the following valve  
size values must be in Digit 9:  
High Heat Coil: 3 = 1.0", 4 = 1.25",  
5 = 1.50", 6 = 2.0", 7 = 2.5"  
Low Heat Coil: C = 1.0", D = 1.25",  
E = 1.50", F = 2.0", G = 2.5"  
5 = Space Pressure Control with  
Exhaust and Bypass  
Digit 10 - Design Sequence  
W = Disconnect Redesign  
Note: Sequence may be any letter  
A thru Z, or any digit 1 thru 9.  
6 = VAV Supply Air Temperature Control 35 0 = None  
with VFD without Bypass  
7 = VAV Supply Air Temperature Control  
36 6 = Factory-Powered 15A GFI  
Convenience Outlet  
with VFD and Bypass  
8 = Supply and Exhaust Fan with  
VFD and without Bypass  
9 = Supply and Exhaust Fan with  
VFD and Bypass  
Digit 11 - Exhaust Option  
O = None  
7 = 100%, 15 HP w/ Statitrac  
8 = 100%, 20 HP w/ Statitrac  
9 = 100%, 25 HP w/ Statitrac  
F = 50%, 15 HP  
H = 100%, 30 HP w/ Statitrac  
J = 100%, 40 HP w/ Statitrac  
K = 100%, 15 HP w/o Statitrac (CV Only)  
L = 100%, 20 HP w/o Statitrac (CV Only)  
M = 100%, 25 HP w/o Statitrac (CV Only)  
N = 100%, 30 HP w/o Statitrac (CV Only)  
P = 100%, 40 HP w/o Statitrac (CV Only)  
Echelon, LON, LONWORKS, LonBuilder, NodeBuilder, LonManager,  
LonTalk, LonUsers, Neuron, 3120, 3150, the Echelon logo, and the  
LonUsers logo are trademarks of Echelon Corporation registered in the  
United States and other countries. LonLink, LonResponse, LonSupport,  
LonMaker, and LonPoint are trademarks of Echelon Corporation.  
5
General Information (Continued)  
Unit Nameplate  
Commonly Used Acronyms  
For convenience, a number of acronyms and abbreviations  
are used throughout this manual. These acronyms are al-  
phabetically listed and defined below.  
BAS = Building automation systems  
CFM = Cubic-feet-per-minute  
CKT. = Circuit  
One Mylar unit nameplate is located on the outside upper  
left corner of the control panel door. It includes the unit  
model number, serial number, electrical characteristics,  
weight, refrigerant charge, as well as other pertinent unit  
data. A small metal nameplate with the Model Number, Se-  
rial Number, and Unit Weight is located just above the Mylar  
nameplate, and a third nameplate is located on the inside of  
the control panel door.  
CV = Constant volume  
CW = Clockwise  
CCW = Counterclockwise  
E/A = Exhaust air  
ECEM = Exhaust/comparative enthalpy module  
F/A = Fresh air  
Compressor Nameplate  
The Nameplate for the Scroll Compressor is located on the  
compressor lower housing.  
GBAS = Generic building automation system  
HGBP = Hot gas bypass  
HI = Human Interface  
Hazard Identification  
HVAC = Heating, ventilation and air conditioning  
IGV = Inlet guide vanes  
I/O = Inputs/outputs  
IOM = Installation/operation/ maintenance manual  
IPC = Interprocessor communications  
IPCB = Interprocessor communications bridge  
LCI-I = LonTalk Communication Interface for IntelliPak  
LH = Left-hand  
MCM = Multiple compressor module  
MWU = Morning warm-up  
NSB = Night setback  
O/A = Outside air  
psig = Pounds-per-square-inch, gauge pressure  
R/A = Return air  
potentially hazardous  
situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or  
serious injury.  
WARNING– Indicates a  
CAUTION – Indicates a potentially hazardous  
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or  
moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against  
unsafe practices.  
RH = Right-hand  
RPM = Revolutions-per-minute  
RT = Rooftop unit  
RTM = Rooftop module  
S/A = Supply air  
SCM = Single circuit module  
SZ = Single-zone (unit airflow)  
TCI = Tracer communications module  
UCM = Unit control modules  
VAV = Variable air volume  
VCM = Ventilation control module  
VOM = Ventilation override module  
w.c. = Water column  
WARNING  
Fiberglass Wool  
Product contains fiberglass wool. Disturbing the insula-  
tion in this product during installation, maintenance or  
repair will expose you to airborne particles of glass  
wool fibers and ceramic fibers known to the state of  
California to cause cancer through inhalation. Glass  
wool fibers may also cause respiratory, skin or eye irri-  
tation.  
Precautionary Measures  
Unit Description  
Each Trane commercial, single-zone rooftop air conditioner  
ships fully assembled and charged with the proper refriger-  
ant quantity from the factory.  
An optional roof curb, specifically designed for the S_HF  
and S_HG units is available from Trane. The roof curb kit  
must be field assembled and installed according to the lat-  
est edition of SAHF-IN-5 or SXHG-IN-2 respectively.  
Trane Commercial Rooftop Units are controlled by a micro-  
electronic control system that consists of a network of mod-  
ules and are referred to as Unit Control Modules (UCM).  
The acronym UCM is used extensively throughout this  
document when referring to the control system network.  
- Avoid breathing fiberglass dust.  
- Use a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator.  
- Avoid contact with the skin or eyes. Wear long-  
sleeved, loose-fitting clothing, gloves, and eye  
protection.  
- Wash clothes separately from other clothing:  
rinse washer thoroughly.  
- Operations such as sawing, blowing, tear-out, and  
spraying may generate fiber concentrations requiring  
additional respiratory protection. Use the appropriate  
NIOSH approved respiration in these situations.  
These modules through Proportional/Integral control algo-  
rithms perform specific unit functions which provide the best  
possible comfort level for the customer.  
First Aid Measures  
They are mounted in the control panel and are factory  
wired to their respective internal components. They receive  
and interpret information from other unit modules, sensors,  
remote panels, and customer binary contacts to satisfy the  
applicable request for economizing, mechanical cooling,  
heating, and ventilation. Refer to the following discussion for  
an explanation of each module function.  
Eye Contact - Flush eyes with water to remove  
dust. If symptoms persist, seek medical attention.  
Skin Contact - Wash affected areas gently with soap  
and warm water after handling.  
6
General Information (Continued)  
Rooftop Module (RTM - 1U48 Standard on all units)  
The Rooftop Module (RTM) responds to cooling, heating,  
and ventilation requests by energizing the proper unit com-  
ponents based on information received from other unit mod-  
ules, sensors, remote panels, and customer supplied bi-  
nary inputs. It initiates supply fan, exhaust fan, exhaust  
damper, inlet guide vane positioning or variable frequency  
drive output, and economizer operation based on that in-  
formation.  
Ventilation Override Module (VOM - Optional 1U51)  
The Ventilation Override module initiates specified func-  
tions such as; space pressurization, exhaust, purge, purge  
with duct pressure control, and unit off when any one of the  
five (5) binary inputs to the module are activated. The com-  
pressors and condenser fans are disabled during the ven-  
tilation operation. If more than one ventilation sequence is  
activated, the one with the highest priority is initiated.  
RTM Resistance Input vs Setpoint Temperatures  
Interprocessor Communications Board (IPCB -  
Optional 1U55 used with the Optional Remote Human  
Interface)  
The Interprocessor Communication Board expands commu-  
nications from the rooftop unit UCM network to a Remote  
Human Interface Panel. DIP switch settings on the IPCB  
module for this application should be; Switches 1 and 2  
"Off", Switch 3 "On".  
RTM cooling or  
RTM cooling  
heating  
setpoint input  
setpoint input  
used as the  
source for a  
used as the  
source for  
SUPPLY AIR  
Resistance  
(Ohms) Max.  
Tolerance 5%  
ZONE temp  
temp setpoint  
setpoint (oF)  
cooling (oF)  
40  
45  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
n/a  
n/a  
40  
45  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
1084  
992  
899  
796  
695  
597  
500  
403  
305  
208  
111  
Trane Communications Interface Module (TCI - Optional  
1U54 used on units with Trane ICSTM  
)
The Trane Communication Interface module expands com-  
munications from the unit UCM network to a Trane Tracer  
100TM or a Tracer SummitTM system and allows external  
setpoint adjustment and monitoring of status and diagnos-  
tics. DIP Switch settings on the TCI  
module for these applications should be:  
Tracer 100 (Comm3): Switches 1, 2, and 3 are "Off";  
Tracer Summit (Comm4): Switch 1 is "On", switches 2, and  
3 are "Off"  
Lontalk Communication Interface Module (LCI - Optional  
1U54 - used on units withTrane ICSTM or 3rd party Build-  
ing AutomationSystems)  
The LonTalk Communication Interface module expands  
communications from the unit UCM network to a Trane  
Tracer SummitTM or a 3rd party building automation system,  
utilizing LonTalk, and allows external setpoint and configu-  
ration adjustment and monitoring of status and diagnostics.  
RTM Resistance Value vs System Operating Mode  
Resistance  
applied to RTM  
MODE input  
Terminals (Ohms)  
Max. Tolerance  
5%  
Constant Volume Units  
Fan  
Mode  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
On  
System  
Mode  
Off  
2320  
4870  
7680  
10770  
Cool  
Auto  
Off  
Exhaust/Comparative Enthalpy Module (ECEM -  
Optional 1U52 used on units with Statitrac and/or  
comparative enthalpy options)  
The Exhaust/Comparative Enthalpy module receives infor-  
mation from the return air humidity sensor, the outside air  
humidity sensor, and the return air temperature sensor to  
utilize the lowest possible humidity level when considering  
economizer operation. In addition, it receives space pres-  
sure information which is used to maintain the space pres-  
sure to within the setpoint controlband. Refer to the table  
below for the Humidity vs Voltage input values.  
On  
On  
Auto  
On  
Cool  
Auto  
Heat  
Heat  
13320  
16130  
19480  
27930  
Compressor Module (SCM & MCM - 1U49 standard on  
all units)  
The Compressor module, (Single Circuit & Multiple Circuit),  
upon receiving a request for mechanical cooling, energizes  
the appropriate compressors and condenser fans. It moni-  
tors the compressor operation through feedback information  
it receives from various protection devices.  
Human Interface Module (HI - 1U65 standard on all  
units)  
The Human Interface module enables the operator to adjust  
the operating parameters for the unit using it's 16 key key-  
pad. The 2 line, 40 character LCD screen provides status  
information for the various unit functions as well as menus  
for the operator to set or modify the operating parameters.  
Heat Module (1U50 used on heating units)  
The Heat module, upon receiving a request for Heating, en-  
ergizes the appropriate heating stages or strokes the Modu-  
lating Heating valve as required.  
7
General Information (Continued)  
Ventilation Control Module (VCM - Design special  
option only)  
For complete application details of the module, refer to En-  
gineering Bulletin RT-EB-109.  
The Ventilation Control Module (VCM) is located in the filter  
section of the unit and is linked to the unit's UCM network.  
Using a "velocity pressure" sensing ring located in the fresh  
air section, allows the VCM to monitor and control the quan-  
tity of fresh air entering the unit to a minimum airflow set-  
point.  
Input Devices & System Functions  
The descriptions of the following basic Input Devices used  
within the UCM network are to acquaint the operator with  
their function as they interface with the various modules.  
Refer to the unit's electrical schematic for the specific mod-  
ule connections.  
An optional temperature sensor can be connected to the  
VCM which enables it to control a field installed fresh air  
preheater.  
Constant Volume & Variable Air Volume Units  
An optional CO sensor can be connected to the VCM to  
control CO res2et. The reset function adjust the minimum  
CFM upwa2rd as the CO2 concentrations increase. The  
maximum effective (reset) setpoint value for fresh air enter-  
ing the unit is limited to the systems operating CFM. The  
following table lists the Minimum Outside Air CFM vs Input  
Voltage.  
Supply Air Temperature Sensor (3RT9)  
Is an analog input device used with CV & VAV applications.  
It monitors the supply air temperature for; supply air tem-  
perature control (VAV), supply air temperature reset (VAV),  
supply air temperature low limiting (CV), supply air temper-  
ing (CV/VAV). It is mounted in the supply air discharge sec-  
tion of the unit and is connected to the RTM (1U48).  
Minimum Outside Air Setpoint  
w/VCM Module & TraqTM Sensing  
Return Air Temperature Sensor (3RT6)  
Is an analog input device used with a return humidity sen-  
sor on CV & VAV applications when the comparative en-  
thalpy option is ordered. It monitors the return air tempera-  
ture and compares it to the outdoor temperature to estab-  
lish which temperature is best suited to maintain the cooling  
requirements. It is mounted in the return air section and is  
connected to the ECEM (1U52).  
Unit  
20 & 25 Ton  
30 Ton  
40 Ton  
50 & 55 Ton  
Input Volts  
0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
CFM  
0 - 14000  
0 - 17000  
0 - 22000  
0 - 28000  
0 - 33000  
0 - 46000  
60 thru 75 Ton 0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
90 thru 130 Ton 0.5 - 4.5 vdc  
Evaporator Temperature Sensor (3RT14 and 3RT15)  
Is an analog input device used with CV & VAV applications.  
It monitors the refrigerant temperature inside the evaporator  
coil to prevent coil freezing. It is attached to the suction line  
near the evaporator coil and is connected to the SCM/MCM  
(1U49). It is factory set for 30 F and has an adjustable  
range of 25 F to 35 F. The compressors are staged "Off" as  
necessary to prevent icing. After the last compressor stage  
has been turned "Off", the compressors will be allowed to  
restart once the evaporator temperature rises 10 F above  
the "coil frost cutout temperature" and the minimum three  
minute "Off" time has elapsed.  
The velocity pressure transducer/solenoid assembly is illus-  
trated below. Refer to the "TraqTM Sensor Sequence of Op-  
eration" section for VCM operation.  
Velocity Pressure Transducer/Solenoid Assembly  
Filter Switch (3S21)  
Is a binary input device used on CV & VAV applications. It  
measures the pressure differential across the unit filters. It  
is mounted in the filter section and is connected to the RTM  
(1U48). A diagnostic SERVICE signal is sent to the remote  
panel if the pressure differential across the filters is at least  
0.5" w.c.. The contacts will automatically open when the  
pressure differential across the filters decrease to 0.4" w.c..  
The switch differential can be field adjusted between 0.17"  
w.c. to 5.0" w.c. ± 0.05" w.c..  
Supply and Exhaust Airflow Proving Switches (3S68  
and 3S69)  
Generic Building Automation System Module  
(GBAS - Optional 1U51 used with non-Trane building  
control systems)  
3S68 is a binary input device used on CV & VAV applica-  
tions to signal the RTM when the supply fan is operating. It  
is located in the supply fan section of the unit and is con-  
nected to the RTM (1U48). During a request for fan opera-  
tion, if the differential switch is detected to be open for 40  
consecutive seconds; compressor operation is turned "Off",  
heat operation is turned "Off", the request for supply fan op-  
eration is turned "Off" and locked out, IGV's (if equipped)  
are "closed", exhaust dampers (if equipped) are "closed",  
economizer dampers (if equipped) are "closed", and a  
manual reset diagnostic is initiated.  
The Generic Building Automation System (GBAS) module  
allows a non-Trane building control system to communicate  
with the rooftop unit and accepts external setpoints in form  
of analog inputs for cooling, heating, supply air pressure,  
and a binary Input for demand limit. Refer to the "Field In-  
stalled Control Wiring" section for the input wiring to the  
GBAS module and the various desired setpoints with the  
corresponding DC voltage inputs for both VAV and CV ap-  
plications.  
8
General Information (Continued)  
3S69 is a binary input device used on all rooftop units  
equipped with an exhaust fan. It is located in the exhaust  
fan section of the unit and is connected to the RTM (1U48).  
During a request for fan operation, if the differential switch  
is detected to be open for 40 consecutive seconds, the  
economizer is closed to the minimum position setpoint, the  
request for exhaust fan operation is turned "Off" and locked  
out, and a manual reset diagnostic is initiated. The fan fail-  
ure lockout can be reset; at the Human Interface located in  
the unit's control panel, by Tracer, or by cycling the control  
power to the RTM (1S70 Off/On).  
denser fans "On". If the operating fans can not bring the  
condensing temperature to within the controlband, more  
fans are turned on. As the saturated condensing tempera-  
ture approaches the lower limit of the controlband, fans are  
sequenced "Off". The minimum "On/Off" time for condenser  
fan staging is 5.2 seconds. If the system is operating at a  
given fan stage below 100% for 30 minutes and the satu-  
rated condensing temperature is above the "efficiency  
check point" setting, a fan stage will be added. If the satu-  
rated condensing temperature falls below the "efficiency  
check point" setting, the fan control will remain at the  
present operating stage. If a fan stage cycles four times  
within a 10 minute period, the control switches from control-  
ling to the "lower limit" to a temperature equal to the "lower  
limit" minus the "temporary low limit suppression" setting. It  
will utilize this new "low limit" temperature for one hour to  
reduce condenser fan short cycling.  
Lead-Lag  
Is a selectable mode of operation on 40 thru 130 Ton units  
within the Human Interface. It alternates the starting be-  
tween the first compressor of each refrigeration circuit. Only  
the compressor banks will switch, not the order of the com-  
pressors within a bank, providing the first compressor in  
each circuit had been activated during the same request for  
cooling.  
High Pressure Controls  
High Pressure controls are located on the discharge lines  
near the scroll compressors. They are designed to open  
when the discharge pressure approaches 405 ± 7 psig. The  
controls reset automatically when the discharge pressure  
decreases to approximately 300 ± 20 psig. However, the  
compressors on that circuit are locked out and a manual re-  
set diagnostic is initiated.  
Supply and Exhaust Fan Circuit Breakers (1CB1, 1CB2)  
The supply fan and exhaust fan motors are protected by cir-  
cuit breakers 1CB1 and 1CB2 respectively. They will trip  
and interrupt the power supply to the motors if the current  
exceeds the breaker's "must trip" value. The rooftop module  
(RTM) will shut all system functions "Off" when an open fan  
proving switch is detected.  
Outdoor Air Humidity Sensor (3U63)  
Is an analog input device used on CV & VAV applications  
with 100% economizer. It monitors the outdoor humidity lev-  
els for economizer operation. It is mounted in the fresh air  
intake section and is connected to the RTM (1U48).  
Low Pressure Control  
Is accomplished using a binary input device on CV & VAV  
applications. LP cutouts are located on the suction lines  
near the scroll compressors.  
Return Air Humidity Sensor (3U64)  
The LPC contacts are designed to close when the suction  
pressure exceeds 22 ± 4 psig. If the LP control is open  
when a compressor is requested to start, none of the com-  
pressors on that circuit will be allowed to operate. They are  
locked out and a manual reset diagnostic is initiated.  
Is an analog input device used on CV & VAV applications  
with the comparative enthalpy option. It monitors the return  
air humidity level and compares it to the outdoor humidity  
level to establish which conditions are best suited to main-  
tain the cooling requirements. It is mounted in the return air  
section and is connected to the ECEM (1U52).  
The LP cutouts are designed to open if the suction pressure  
approaches 7 ± 4 psig. If the LP cutout opens after a com-  
pressor has started, all compressors operating on that cir-  
cuit will be turned off immediately and will remain off for a  
minimum of three minutes.  
Low Ambient Control  
The low ambient modulating output on the compressor  
module is functional on all units with or without the low am-  
bient option. When the compressor module has staged up  
to it's highest stage (stage 2 or 3 depending on unit size),  
the modulating output will be at 100% (10 VDC). When the  
control is at stage 1, the modulating output (0 to 10 VDC)  
will control the saturated condensing temperature to within  
the programmable "condensing temperature low ambient  
control point".  
If the LP cutout trips four consecutive times during the first  
three minutes of operation, the compressors on that circuit  
will be locked out and a manual reset diagnostic is initiated.  
Saturated Condenser Temperature Sensors (2RT1 and  
2RT2)  
Are analog input devices used on CV & VAV applications  
mounted inside a temperature well located on a condenser  
tube bend. They monitor the saturated refrigerant tempera-  
ture inside the condenser coil and are connected to the  
SCM/MCM (1U49). As the saturated refrigerant temperature  
varies due to operating conditions, the condenser fans are  
cycled "On" or "Off" as required to maintain acceptable op-  
erating pressures.  
Status/Annunciator Output  
Is an internal function within the RTM (1U48) module on CV  
& VAV applications that provides;  
a. diagnostic and mode status signals to the remote  
panel (LEDs) and to the Human Interface.  
b. control of the binary Alarm output on the RTM.  
Head Pressure Control  
c. control of the binary outputs on the GBAS module to  
inform the customer of the operational status and/or  
diagnostic conditions.  
is accomplished using two saturated refrigerant tempera-  
ture sensors on CV & VAV applications. During a request  
for compressor operation, when the condensing tempera-  
ture rises above the "lower limit" of the controlband, the  
Compressor Module (SCM/MCM) starts sequencing con-  
9
General Information (Continued)  
compressor(s) on that circuit "Off", locks out all compressor  
operation for that circuit, and initiates a manual reset diag-  
nostic.  
Low Ambient Compressor Lockout  
Utilizes an analog input device for CV & VAV applications.  
When the system is configured for low ambient compressor  
lockout, the compressors are not allowed to operate if the  
temperature of the outside air falls below the lockout set-  
point. When the temperature rises 5 F above the lockout  
setpoint, the compressors are allowed to operate. The set-  
point for units without the low ambient option is 50 F. For  
units with the low ambient option, the setpoint is 0 F. The  
setpoints are adjustable at the Human Interface inside the  
unit control panel.  
Supply AirTemperature Low Limit  
Uses the supply air temperature sensor input to modulate  
the economizer damper to minimum position in the event  
the supply air temperature falls below the occupied heating  
setpoint temperature.  
Freezestat (4S12)  
Is a binary input device used on CV & VAV units with Hy-  
dronic Heat. It is mounted in the heat section and con-  
nected to the Heat Module (1U50). If the temperature of the  
air entering the heating coil falls to 40 F, the normally open  
contacts on the freezestat closes signalling the Heat Mod-  
ule (1U50) and the Rooftop Module (RTM) to:  
a. drive the Hydronic Heat Actuator (4U15) to the full  
open position.  
Space Pressure Transducer (3U62)  
Is an analog input device used on CV & VAV applications  
with the Statitrac option. It modulates the exhaust dampers  
to keep the space pressure within the building to a cus-  
tomer designated controlband. It is mounted in the filter  
section just above the exhaust damper actuator and is con-  
nected to the ECEM (1U52). Field supplied pneumatic tub-  
ing must be connected between the space being controlled  
and the transducer assembly.  
b. turn the supply fan "Off".  
c. closes the outside air damper;  
d. turns "On" the SERVICE light at the Remote Panel.  
e. initiates a "Freezestat" diagnostic to the Human  
Interface.  
Transducer Voltage Output vs Pressure Input  
4.0  
High Duct Temp Thermostats (Optional 3S16, 3S17)  
Are binary input devices used on CV & VAV applications  
with a Trane Communication Interface Module (TCI). They  
provide "high limit" shutdown of the unit and requires a  
manual reset. They are factory set to open if the supply air  
temperature reaches 240 F, or the return air temperature  
reaches 135 F. Once tripped, the thermostat can be reset  
by pressing the button located on the sensor once the air  
temperature has decreased approximately 25 F below the  
cutout point.  
3.5  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
0.5  
Compressor Circuit Breakers (1CB8, 1CB9, 1CB10,  
1CB11 & 1CB14, 1CB15, 1CB16, 1CB17)  
The Scroll Compressors are protected by circuit breakers  
which interrupt the power supply to the compressors if the  
current exceeds the breakers “must trip” value. During a re-  
quest for compressor operation, if the Compressor Module  
(SCM) detects a problem outside of it's normal parameters,  
it turns any operating compressor(s) on that circuit "Off",  
locks out all compressor operation for that circuit, and ini-  
tiates a manual reset diagnostic.  
0.0  
-0.5 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0  
Pressure (inches w.c.)  
Morning Warm-Up - Zone Heat  
When a system changes from an unoccupied to an occu-  
pied mode, or switches from STOPPED to AUTO, or power  
is applied to a unit with the MWU option, the heater in the  
unit or external heat will be brought on if the space tem-  
perature is below the MWU setpoint. The heat will remain  
on until the temperature reaches the MWU setpoint. If the  
unit is VAV, then the VAV box/unocc relay will continue to  
stay in the unoccupied position and the VFD/IGV output  
will stay at 100% during the MWU mode. When the MWU  
setpoint is reached and the heat mode is terminated, then  
the VAV box/unocc relay will switch to the occupied mode  
and the VFD/IGV output will be controlled by the duct static  
pressure. During Full Capacity MWU the economizer  
damper is held closed for as long as it takes to reach  
setpoint. During Cycling Capacity MWU the economizer  
damper is allowed to go to minimum position after one  
hour of operation if setpoint has not been reached.  
Constant Volume (CV) Units  
ZoneTemperature - Cooling  
Relies on input from a sensor located directly in the space,  
while a system is in the occupied "Cooling" mode. It modu-  
lates the economizer (if equipped) and/or stages the me-  
chanical cooling "On and Off" as required to maintain the  
zone temperature to within the cooling setpoint deadband.  
Zone Temperature - Heating  
Relies on input from a sensor located directly in the space,  
while a system is in the occupied "Heating" mode or an un-  
occupied period, to stage the heat "on and off" or to modu-  
late the heating valve (hydronic heat only) as required to  
maintain the zone temperature to within the heating setpoint  
deadband. The supply fan will be requested to operate any  
time there is a requested for heat. On gas heat units, the  
fan will continue to run for 60 seconds after the furnace is  
turned off.  
Compressor Motor Winding Thermostats (2B7S1,  
2B17S2, 2B27S5, 2B8S3, 2B18S4 & 2B28S6)  
A thermostat is embedded in the motor windings of each  
Scroll compressor. Each thermostat is designed to open if  
the motor windings exceeds approximately 221 F. The ther-  
mostat will reset automatically when the winding tempera-  
ture decreases to approximately 181 F. Rapid cycling, loss  
of charge, abnormally high suction temperatures, or the  
compressor running backwards could cause the thermostat  
to open. During a request for compressor operation, if the  
Compressor Module (SCM) detects a problem outside of  
it's normal parameters, it turns any operating  
Supply AirTempering  
On CV units equipped with staged heat, if the supply air  
temperature falls 10 F below the occupied heating setpoint  
temperature while the heater is "Off", the first stage of heat  
will be turned "On". The heater is turned "Off" when the sup-  
ply air temperature reaches 10 F above the occupied heat-  
ing setpoint temperature.  
10  
General Information (Continued)  
and the unit will return to discharge air control. If the occ  
zone heating setpoint is less than the DWU terminate  
setpoint, the heat will turn off when the occ zone heat  
setpoint is reached, but it will stay in DWU mode and cycle  
the heat to maintain setpoint.  
Variable Air Volume (VAV) Units  
Occupied Heating - Supply Air Temperature  
When a VAV units is equipped with "Modulating Heat", and  
the system is in an occupied mode, and the field supplied  
changeover relay contacts (5K87) have closed, the supply  
air temperature will be controlled to the customer specified  
supply air heating setpoint. It will remain in the heating sta-  
tus until the changeover relay contacts are opened.  
Occupied Cooling - Supply AirTemperature  
When a VAV unit is in the occupied mode, the supply air  
temperature will be controlled to the customers specified  
supply air cooling setpoint by modulating the economizer  
and/or staging the mechanical cooling "On and Off" as re-  
quired. The changeover relay contacts must be open on  
units with "Modulating Heat" for the cooling to operate.  
Daytime Warm-up  
On VAV units equipped with heat, if the zone temperature  
falls below the daytime warm-up initiate temperature dur-  
ing the occupied mode, the system will switch to full air-  
flow. During this mode, the VAV box/unocc relay, RTM K3,  
will be energized (this is to signal the VAV boxes to go to  
100%). After the VAV box max stroke time has elapsed  
(factory set at 6 minutes), the VFD/IGV output will be set to  
100%. The airflow will be at 100% and the heat will be  
turned on to control to the occupied heating setpoint.  
When the zone temperature reaches the daytime warm-up  
termination setpoint, the heat will be turned off, the K3 re-  
lay will be de-energized, releasing the VAV boxes, the  
VFD/IGV output will go back to duct static pressure control  
Unoccupied Heating - ZoneTemperature  
When a VAV unit is equipped with gas, electric, or hydronic  
heat and is in the unoccupied mode, the zone temperature  
will be controlled to within the customers specified setpoint  
deadband. During an unoccupied mode for a VAV unit, the  
VAV box/unocc relay will be in the unoccupied position and  
the VFD/IGV output will be at 100%. This means that if  
there is a call for heat (or cool) and the supply fan comes  
on, it will be at full airflow and the VAV boxes in the space  
will need to be 100% open as signaled by the VAV box/  
unocc relay.  
Supply AirTempering  
On VAV units equipped with "Modulating Heat", if the sup-  
ply air temperature falls 10 F below the supply air tempera-  
ture setpoint, the hydronic heat valve will modulate to  
maintain the supply air temperature to within the low end  
of the setpoint deadband.  
Supply Duct Static Pressure Control (Occupied)  
The RTM relies on input from the duct pressure transducer  
when a unit is equipped with Inlet Guide Vanes or a Vari-  
able Frequency Drive to position the Inlet Guide Vanes or  
set the supply fan speed to maintain the supply duct static  
pressure to within the static pressure setpoint deadband.  
Refer to the Transducer Voltage Output vs Pressure Input  
values listed in the Space Pressure Transducer (3U62)  
section.  
Unit Component Layout and "Shipwith" Locations  
11  
General Information (Continued)  
Space Temperature Averaging with Multiple Sensors  
Space Temperature Averaging  
Space temperature averaging for Constant Volume applica-  
tions is accomplished by wiring a number of remote sensors  
in a series/parallel circuit.  
The fewest number of sensors required to accomplish  
space temperature averaging is four. Figure 8 illustrates a  
single sensor circuit (Single Zone), four sensors wired in a  
series/parallel circuit (Four Zone), nine sensors wired in a  
series/parallel circuit (Nine Zone). Any number squared, is  
the number of remote sensors required.  
Wiring termination will depend on the type of remote panel  
or control configuration for the system. Refer to the wiring  
diagrams that shipped with the unit.  
Unit Control Modules (UCM)  
Control Module Locations for S_HF 30 Ton Units  
Unit control modules are microelectronic circuit boards de-  
signed to perform specific unit functions. These modules  
through Proportional/Integral control algorithms provide the  
best possible comfort level for the customer. They are  
mounted in the control panel and are factory wired to their  
respective internal components. They receive and interpret  
information from other unit modules, sensors, remote pan-  
els, and customer binary contacts to satisfy the applicable  
request for economizing, mechanical cooling, heating, and  
ventilation. Figure 9 below illustrates the typical location of  
each "1U" designated module.  
J2-1  
RTM  
1U48  
1TB9  
J1-1  
ECEM  
1U52  
J2-1  
Bracket  
J1-1  
1PCB MOD  
1U55  
SCM  
1U49  
Bracket  
J2-1  
Bracket  
J2-1  
J1-1  
Heat MOD  
1U50  
J1-1  
J1-1  
Bracket  
Mounting  
Plate  
Bracket  
J2-1  
GBAS MOD  
1U51  
Control Module Locations for S_HF 20 & 25 Ton Units  
TCI MOD  
1U54  
OR  
J2-1  
J1-1  
Mounting  
Plate  
LCI MOD  
1U54  
SCM  
1U49  
VOM  
1U53  
Bracket  
Bracket  
J2-1  
J1-1  
Bracket  
J2-1  
Heat MOD  
1U50  
J1-1  
RTM  
1U48  
Mounting  
Plate  
J2-1  
J1-1  
J2-1  
Bracket  
J1-1  
1TB9  
TCI MOD  
1U54  
Bracket  
Bracket  
OR  
ECEM  
1U52  
LCI MOD  
1U54  
J1-1  
1PCB MOD  
1U55  
J2-1  
J2-1  
GBAS MOD  
1U51  
Mounting J1-1  
Plate  
VOM  
1U53  
J1-1  
Bracket  
J2-1  
J2-1  
Mounting  
Plate  
J1-1  
12  
General Information (Continued)  
Control Module Locations for S_HF 40, 60, 70 &  
75 Ton Units  
Control Module Locations for S_HF 50 & 55 Ton Units  
MCM  
1U49  
J2-1  
MCM  
Bracket  
1U49  
J1-1  
J2-1  
RTM  
Heat MOD  
1U50  
1U48  
Bracket  
Heat MOD  
TCI MOD  
1U54  
RTM  
1U48  
J1-1  
Mounting  
Plate  
Bracket  
OR  
1U50  
J1-1  
LCI MOD  
1U54  
J2-1  
J2-1  
Bracket  
Mounting  
Plate  
J2-1  
J2-1  
J2-1  
J1-1  
J1-1  
1TB9  
J1-1  
J1-1  
OR  
LCI MOD  
Bracket  
TCI MOD  
1U54  
J1-1  
1TB9  
J2-1  
ECEM  
1U52  
J1-1  
Bracket  
1U54  
1PCB MOD  
1U55  
J1-1  
Bracket  
Bracket  
J2-1  
J2-1  
J1-1  
Bracket  
J2-1  
J1-1  
J2-1  
J1-1  
Mounting  
Plate  
ECEM  
1U52  
J1-1  
Mounting  
Plate  
J2-1  
J1-1  
Bracket  
J2-1  
Bracket  
1PCB MOD  
1U55  
GBAS MOD  
1U51  
J2-1  
J2-1  
GBAS MOD  
1U51  
Mounting  
Plate  
J1-1  
Mounting  
Plate  
VOM  
1U53  
VOM  
1U53  
Control Module Locations for S_HG 90 - 130 Ton Units  
Bracket  
RTM  
1U48  
Bracket  
GBAS MOD  
1U51  
Mounting  
Plate  
VOM  
Bracket  
1U53  
J1-1  
1TB9  
J1-1  
Bracket  
J2-1  
Bracket  
MCM  
1U49  
ECEM  
1U52  
J2-1  
Mounting  
Plate  
Bracket  
J1-1  
J2-1  
1PCB MOD  
1U55  
Heat MOD  
1U50  
J1-1  
Mounting  
Plate  
LCI MOD  
1U54  
J2-1  
J1-1  
J2-1  
TCI MOD  
1U54  
J1-1  
J2-1  
OR  
J1-1  
J2-1  
13  
Table of Contents  
Section One  
Section Four  
About The Manual ...............................................................2  
Literature Change History ................................................2  
Overview of Manual .........................................................2  
Unit Start-Up ......................................................................55  
Cooling Sequence of Operation ....................................55  
Gas Heating Sequence of Operation.............................56  
Fenwal Ignition System ..................................................56  
Honeywell Ignition System.............................................56  
Modulating Gas Sequence of Operation .......................57  
Flame Failure .................................................................57  
Electric Heat Sequence of Operation ............................58  
Wet Heat Sequence of Operation ..................................58  
Electrical Phasing ..........................................................59  
Voltage Supply and Voltage Imbalance .........................60  
Service Test Guide for Component Operation...............61  
Verifying Proper Fan Rotation .......................................63  
If all of the fans are rotating backwards;........................63  
System Airflow Measurements ......................................63  
Constant Volume Systems.............................................63  
Variable Air Volume Systems .........................................65  
Exhaust Airflow Measurement .......................................66  
TraqTM Sensor Airflow Measurement ...........................66  
Economizer Damper Adjustment ...................................80  
Compressor Start-Up .....................................................82  
Compressor Operational Sounds ..................................83  
Thermostatic Expansion Valves.....................................93  
Charging by Subcooling .................................................93  
Low Ambient Dampers ...................................................93  
Electric, Steam and Hot Water Start-Up ........................94  
Gas Furnace Start-Up ....................................................94  
Two Stage Gas Furnace ................................................95  
Full Modulating Gas Furnace.........................................97  
Limited Modulating Gas Furnace...................................98  
Final Unit Checkout........................................................99  
Section Two  
General Information .............................................................4  
Model Number Description ..............................................4  
Hazard Identification ........................................................6  
Commonly Used Acronyms .............................................6  
Unit Description................................................................6  
Input Devices & System Functions ..................................8  
Constant Volume & Variable Air Volume Units ................8  
Constant Volume (CV) Units ..........................................10  
Variable Air Volume (VAV) Units .................................... 11  
Space Temperature Averaging .......................................12  
Unit Control Modules (UCM) ..........................................12  
Section Three  
Installation..........................................................................14  
Unit Inspection ...............................................................14  
Storage ...........................................................................14  
Unit Clearances .............................................................14  
Unit Dimensions & Weight Information ..........................14  
Roof Curb and Ductwork ...............................................22  
Pitch Pocket Location ....................................................23  
Unit Rigging & Placement ..............................................23  
General Unit Requirements ...........................................25  
Main Electrical Power Requirements.............................25  
Field Installed Control Wiring.........................................25  
Requirements for Electric Heat Units ............................25  
Requirements for Gas Heat ...........................................25  
Requirements for Hot Water Heat (SLH_) .....................25  
Requirements for Steam Heat (SSH_) ..........................26  
O/A Pressure Sensor and Tubing Installation ...............26  
Condensate Drain Connection.......................................27  
Shipping Fasteners ........................................................27  
O/A Sensor & Tubing Installation ...................................31  
Units with Statitrac™; ....................................................31  
Gas Heat Units (SFH_) ..................................................32  
Connecting the Gas Supply Line to the Furnace  
Section Five  
Service & Maintenance....................................................100  
Fan Belt Adjustment .....................................................104  
Scroll Compressor Replacement .................................105  
VFD Programming Parameters ...................................106  
Monthly Maintenance ...................................................107  
Filters............................................................................107  
Cooling Season ............................................................107  
Heating Season............................................................108  
Coil Cleaning ................................................................108  
Final Process ...............................................................109  
Gas Train........................................................................32  
Flue Assembly Installation .............................................34  
Hot Water Heat Units (SLH_) ........................................34  
Steam Heat Units (SSH_) ..............................................35  
Disconnect Switch External Handle...............................38  
Electric Heat Units (SEH_) ............................................38  
Main Unit Power Wiring .................................................38  
Disconnect Switch Sizing (DSS)....................................44  
Field Installed Control Wiring.........................................45  
Controls using 24 VAC ...................................................45  
Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs.......................45  
Constant Volume System Controls ................................45  
Variable Air Volume System Controls ............................46  
Constant Volume or Variable Air Volume System  
Index ............................................................................... 111  
UV ................................................................................... 114  
Warranty ......................................................................... 114  
Controls ..........................................................................46  
Installation  
Unit Inspection  
Storage  
Take precautions to prevent condensate from forming inside  
the unit’s electrical compartments and motors if:  
As soon as the unit arrives at the job site  
[ ] Verify that the nameplate data matches the data on the  
sales order and bill of lading (including electrical data).  
a. the unit is stored before it is installed; or,  
b. the unit is set on the roof curb, and temporary heat is  
provided in the building. Isolate all side panel service  
entrances and base pan openings (e.g., conduit  
holes, S/A and R/A openings, and flue openings)  
from the ambient air until the unit is ready for startup.  
[ ] Verify that the power supply complies with the unit name-  
plate specifications.  
[ ] Verify that the power supply complies with the electric  
heater specifications on the uit nameplate.  
[ ] Visually inspect the exterior of the unit, including the roof,  
for signs of shipping damage.  
Note: Do not use the unit's heater for temporary  
heat without first completing the startup procedure  
detailed under "Starting the Unit".  
[ ] Check for material shortages. Refer to the Component  
Layout and Shipwith Location illustration.  
Trane will not assume any responsibility for  
equipment damage resulting from condensate accumulation  
on the unit's electrical and/or mechanical components.  
If the job site inspection of the unit reveals damage or mate-  
rial shortages, file a claim with the carrier immediately.  
Specify the type and extent of the damage on the "bill of  
lading" before signing.  
Unit Clearances  
Figure 3-1 illustrates the minimum operating and service  
clearances for either a single or multiple unit installation.  
These clearances are the minimum distances necessary to  
assure adequate serviceability, cataloged unit capacity, and  
peak operating efficiency.  
[ ] Visually inspect the internal components for shipping  
damage as soon as possible after delivery and before it  
is stored. Do not walk on the sheet metal base pans.  
Providing less than the recommended clearances may re-  
sult in condenser coil starvation, "short-circuiting" of ex-  
haust and economizer airflows, or recirculation of hot con-  
denser air.  
WARNING  
No Step Surface!  
FOR ACCESS TO COMPONENTS, THE BASE SHEET  
METAL SURFACE MUST BE REINFORCED.  
Unit Dimensions & Weight Information  
Bridging between the unit's main supports may consist  
of multiple 2 by 12 boards or sheet metal grating.  
Overall unit dimensional data for a SAHF (20 thru 75 Ton)  
cooling only unit is illustrated in Figure 3-2A. Tables 3-1A,  
3-1B, and 3-1C list the dimensions. Dimensional data for  
SEH_, SFH_, SLH_, SSH_, and SXH_ (20 thru 130 Ton)  
units are illustrated in Figure 3-2B. Tables 3-2A, 3-2B, and  
3-2C list the dimensions for the 20 thru 75 Ton units. Di-  
mensions for 90 through 130 Ton units are listed on the il-  
lustration in Figure 3-2C.  
Failure to comply could result in death or severe  
personal injury from falling.  
[ ] If concealed damage is discovered, notify the carrier's  
terminal of damage immediately by phone and by mail.  
Concealed damage must be reported within 15 days.  
A Center-of-Gravity illustration and the dimensional data is  
shown in Figure 3-3.  
Request an immediate joint inspection of the damage by  
the carrier and the consignee. Do not remove damaged  
material from the receiving location. Take photos of the  
damage, if possible. The owner must provide reasonable  
evidence that the damage did not occur after delivery.  
Table 3-3 list the typical unit and curb operating weights.  
Weights shown represent approximate operating weights.  
Actual weights are stamped on the unit nameplate.  
[ ] Remove the protective plastic coverings that shipped  
over the compressors.  
14  
Figure 3-1  
Minimum Operation and Service Clearances for Single & Multiple Unit Installation  
15  
16  
Installation (Continued)  
Table 3-1A  
Unit Dimensional Data  
Unit  
Size  
20 & 25 Ton  
30 Ton  
40 Ton  
50 & 55 Ton  
60 Ton  
Dimensions  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
7'  
7'  
8'  
8'  
8'  
8'  
J
21'-9 3/4"  
21'-9 3/4"  
27'-0"  
29'-8"  
27'-0"  
5'-3 1/8"  
5'-8 5/8"  
6'-1 5/8"  
5'-3 1/8"  
6'-1 5/8"  
6'-1 5/8"  
7'-6 1/2" 5'-8 15/16" 3'-9 5/16"  
12'-6"  
12'-6"  
1"  
1"  
1"  
1"  
1"  
1"  
1'-3 1/2"  
1'-3 1/2"  
2'-5"  
2'-5"  
2'-5"  
7'-6 1/2"  
7'-6 1/2"  
7'-6 1/2"  
9'-8"  
6'-2 7/16" 4'-9 5/16"  
6'-7 3/8"  
5'-8 7/8"  
6'-7 3/8"  
6'-7 3/8"  
5'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8"  
6'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8"  
5'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8"  
5'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8"  
70 & 75 Ton  
27'-0"  
9'-8"  
1'-4"  
Table 3-1B  
Unit Base Dimensional Data  
Unit  
Dimensions  
D
Size  
A
B
C
E
F
G
14'-0 1/4"  
2'-2 1/2"  
11 3/4"  
5'-7"  
5'-7"  
3'-4 3/8"  
5 13/16" 6'-6 15/16"  
20 - 30 Ton  
16'-7 13/16"  
16'-7 13/16"  
16'-7 13/16"  
2'-5"  
2'-5"  
2'-5"  
11 3/4"  
3'-4 3/8"  
4'-5 3/8"  
4'-5 3/8"  
5 13/16"  
5 13/16"  
5 13/16"  
7'-8 3/16"  
7'-8 3/16"  
7'-8 3/16"  
40 - 55 Ton  
60 Ton  
1'-4 9/16" 6'-10 7/8"  
1'-4 9/16" 6'-10 7/8"  
70 - 75 Ton  
Table 3-1C  
Electrical Entrance Data  
Unit  
Dimensions  
Size  
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
20, 25, & 30 8 7/32" 6 31/32" 15 21/32" 13 21/32" 9 17/32" 8 1/2" 18 1/16" 19 9/16"  
50 & 55 Ton  
40, 60, 70  
& 75 Ton  
8 3/4" 7 3/4"  
17 7/8"  
15 7/8" 9 29/32" 10 1/16" 20 13/32" 22 5/32"  
17  
18  
Installation (Continued)  
Table 3-2A  
Unit Dimensional Data  
Unit  
Dimensions  
D
Size  
A
B
C
E
F
G
1"  
1"  
H
J
20 & 25 Ton 24'-1 3/8" 5'-3 1/8" 7'-6 1/2" 5'-8 15/16" 3'-9 5/16"  
13'-3"  
13'-3"  
7' 1'-3 1/2"  
7' 1'-3 1/2"  
8'  
8'  
8'  
8'  
30 Ton  
40 Ton  
24'-1 3/8" 5'-8 5/8" 7'-6 1/2" 6'-2 3/8" 4'-9 5/16"  
30'-2 1/2" 6'-1 5/8" 7'-6 1/2" 6'-7 3/8" 5'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8" 1"  
50 & 55 Ton 32'-10 1/2" 5'-3 1/8" 7'-6 1/2" 5'-8 7/8" 6'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8" 1"  
2'-5"  
2'-5"  
2'-5"  
1'-4"  
60 Ton  
30'-2 1/2" 6'-1 5/8"  
9'-8"  
9'-8"  
6'-7 3/8" 5'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8" 1"  
6'-7 3/8" 5'-9 5/16" 15'-11 1/8" 1"  
70 & 75 Ton 30'-2 1/2" 6'-1 5/8"  
Dimensions  
K
L
M
N
O
9"  
9"  
9"  
9"  
9"  
16'-7"  
16'-7"  
19'-7"  
19'-7"  
19'-7"  
16'-6"  
16'-6"  
See Note  
See Note  
See Note  
8 1/8"  
8 1/8"  
8 1/8"  
8 1/8"  
8 1/8"  
6 1/4"  
6 1/4"  
6 1/4"  
6 1/4"  
6 1/4"  
Note:  
19'-6" for SFHF "Low Heat" units or 20'-3" for SFHF "High Heat" units.  
Table 3-2B  
Unit Base Dimensional Data  
Unit  
Dimensions  
Size  
20 - 30 Ton 16'-3 3/16" 2'-2 1/2" 5 13/16" 5'-7" 3'-4 3/8" 5 13/16" 6'-6 15/16" 15'-5 5/16"  
40 - 55 Ton 19'-10 5/16" 2'-5" 7 1/16" 5'-7" 3'-4 3/8" 5 13/16" 7'-8 3/16" 18'-11 11/16"  
60 Ton 19'-10 5/16" 2'-5"  
70 - 75 Ton 19'-10 5/16" 2'-5"  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
6 1/16" Note 1 4'-5 3/8" 5 13/16" 7'-8 3/16" 18'-11 11/16"  
6 1/16" Note 1 4'-5 3/8" 5 13/16" 7'-8 3/16" 18'-11 11/16"  
Unit  
Size  
Dimensions  
J
K
L
20 - 30 Ton 16'-9 3/4" 8 13/16" 9 1/16"  
40 - 55 Ton 20'-1 3/4" 8 3/16" 9 1/16"  
60 Ton  
20'-1 3/4" 8 3/16" 9 1/16"  
70 - 75 Ton 20'-1 3/4" 8 3/16" 9 1/16"  
Note:  
1. 5'-5 15/16" for SEHF units or 7'-8 1/2" for SFHF, SLHF, SSHF, SXHF units.  
Table 3-2C  
Electrical Entrance Data  
Unit  
Size  
Dimensions  
J
F
G
H
K
L
M
N
20, 25, & 30 8 7/32" 6 31/32" 15 21/32" 13 21/32" 9 17/32" 8 1/2" 18 1/16" 19 9/16"  
50 & 55 Ton  
40, 60, 70  
& 75 Ton  
8 3/4" 7 3/4" 17 7/8" 15 7/8" 9 29/32" 10 1/16" 20 13/32" 22 5/32"  
Table 3-2D  
CPVC Dimensional Data  
Unit Size  
Furnace Dimensions (Note)  
Unit Size  
Furnace Dimensions (Note)  
Size/MBH  
20 & 25 Ton Low = 235 195-5/32"  
High = 500 195-5/32"  
Length  
Height  
9-5/32"  
9-5/32"  
9-5/32"  
9-5/32"  
9-5/32"  
9-5/32"  
Size/MBH  
50 - 75 Ton Low = 500 240-1/8"  
High = 850 231-1/8"  
Length  
Height  
9-5/32"  
9-5/32"  
30 Ton  
Low = 350 195-5/32"  
High = 500 195-5/32"  
Low = 350  
90 -130 Ton  
Note:  
1000  
267-3/16" 10-11/32"  
The length dimension is from the exhaust  
end of the unit. The height dimension is  
from the bottom of the unit base rail.  
40 Ton  
240-1/8"  
High = 850 231-1/8"  
19  
Figure 3-2C  
S_HG Cooling & Heating Units (90 through 130 Ton)  
20  
Figure 3-3  
Center-of-Gravity Data (See Note 1)  
Units with  
100%  
Units  
without  
Units  
with Supply &  
Exhaust Fan Exhaust Fan Exhaust VFD  
Unit Unit Dim. Dim. Dim. Dim. Dim. Dim.  
Model Size  
A
B
A
B
A
B
C20 12' 6" 3' 8" 13' 5" 3' 10" 11' 10" 3' 9"  
C25 12' 9" 3' 8" 13' 7" 3' 10" 12' 0" 3' 9"  
C30 12' 5" 3' 8" 13' 3" 3' 10" 11' 9" 3' 9"  
C40 15' 7" 3' 10" 16' 9" 4' 0" 14' 10" 3' 11"  
C50 16' 7" 3' 10" 17' 9" 4' 0" 15' 8" 3' 11"  
C55 16' 10" 3' 10" 18' 1" 4' 0" 16' 0" 3' 11"  
C60 15' 7" 4' 7" 16' 11" 4' 10" 14' 10" 4' 8"  
C70 15' 10" 4' 8" 17' 1" 4' 10" 15' 2" 4' 9"  
C75 15' 11" 4' 8" 17' 2" 4' 10" 15' 2" 4' 9"  
C20 13' 8" 3' 8" 14' 7" 3' 10" 12' 11" 3' 9"  
C25 13' 10" 3' 7" 14' 9" 3' 9" 13' 1" 3' 9"  
C30 13' 6" 3' 8" 14' 5" 3' 9" 12' 10" 3' 9"  
C40 17' 10" 3' 10" 18' 3" 3' 11" 16' 3" 3' 11"  
C50 18' 1" 3' 10" 19' 4" 4' 0" 17' 2" 3' 11"  
C55 18' 5" 3' 11" 19' 8" 4' 0" 17' 8" 3' 10"  
C60 17' 0" 4' 7" 18' 6" 4' 9" 16' 3" 4' 8"  
C70 17' 5" 4' 8" 18' 9" 4' 10" 16' 7" 4' 9"  
C75 17' 5" 4' 8" 18' 9" 4' 10" 16' 7" 4' 9"  
C20 13' 10" 3' 8" 14' 8" 3' 10" 13' 1" 3' 9"  
C25 14' 0" 3' 7" 14' 10" 3' 9" 13' 3" 3' 8"  
C30 13' 8" 3' 8" 14' 6" 3' 9" 13' 0" 3' 9"  
C40 17' 3" 3' 9" 18' 5" 3' 11" 16' 6" 3' 10"  
C50 18' 2" 3' 10" 19' 4" 4' 0" 17' 4" 3' 11"  
C55 18' 6" 3' 10" 19' 8" 3' 11" 17' 8" 3' 10"  
C60 17' 3" 4' 6" 18' 7" 4' 9" 16' 5" 4' 7"  
C70 17' 6" 4' 7" 18' 9" 4' 10" 16' 9" 4' 8"  
C75 17' 6" 4' 7" 18' 9" 4' 10" 16' 9" 4' 8"  
SAHF  
SEHF  
SLHF  
SSHF  
SXHF  
SFHF  
SXHG,  
SEHG,  
SLHG,  
SSHG  
SFHG  
C90 18' 9" 5’ 10" 20' 4" 6' 2" 17' 9" 5' 10"  
D11 19' 1" 5’ 11" 20’ 7" 6' 2" 18' 1" 6' 0"  
C90 18' 11" 6' 0" 20' 6" 6' 3" 17' 10" 5' 11"  
D11 19' 3" 6' 0" 20' 9" 6' 4" 18' 4" 6' 7"  
SXHG,  
SEHG,  
SLHG,  
SSHG  
SFHG  
D12 19' 2" 5' 10" 20' 8" 6' 2" 18' 1" 6' 0"  
D13 19' 5" 5' 10" 20' 11" 6' 2" 18' 6" 6' 0"  
D12 19' 4" 6' 0" 20' 9" 6' 3" 18' 3" 6' 1"  
D13 19' 6" 6' 0" 21' 10" 6' 3" 18' 8" 6' 0"  
Note:  
1. Dimensions shown for the center-of-gravity are  
approximate and are based on a unit equipped with:  
Standard coils, 100% economizer, throwaway filters,  
hi-efficiency motors, inlet guide vanes, 460 volt XL start,  
high capacity heat (as applicable).  
21  
Installation (Continued)  
Table 3-3  
Typical Unit & Curb Weights  
Typical Unit Operating Weight (1)  
SE,SL,  
Roof Curb  
Max. Weight (3)  
SAHF S*HF/G  
Unit  
Size  
C20  
C25  
C30  
C40  
C50  
C55  
C60  
C70  
C75  
C90  
D11  
D12  
D13  
SAHF  
4360  
4520  
5220  
6890  
7890  
8140  
9320  
9860  
9860  
SSHF  
4690  
4860  
5590  
7400  
8450  
8690  
9650  
SFHF  
4970  
5130  
5840  
7880  
8900  
9170  
10120  
SXHF  
4580  
4750  
5460  
7240  
8290  
8540  
9480  
SEHG  
SFHG  
SXHG  
490  
490  
490  
515  
515  
515  
610  
610  
610  
510  
510  
510  
550  
550  
550  
640  
640  
640  
770  
770  
770  
770  
10160 10640 10040  
10160 10640 10040  
14730 15400 14580  
15310 15940 15160  
15730 16370 15560  
16080 16710 15930  
Typical Unit Operating Weight (2)  
SE,SL,  
Roof Curb  
Max. Weight (3)  
SXHG SAHF S*HF/G  
Unit  
Size  
C20  
C25  
C30  
C40  
C50  
C55  
C60  
C70  
C75  
C90  
D11  
D12  
D13  
SAHF  
4650  
4830  
5570  
7290  
8350  
8600  
9840  
SSHF  
5000  
5180  
5930  
7820  
8900  
9160  
SFHF  
5270  
5440  
6200  
8280  
9380  
9640  
SXHF  
4860  
5060  
5800  
7650  
8740  
9010  
SEHG  
SFHG  
490  
490  
490  
515  
515  
515  
610  
610  
610  
510  
510  
510  
550  
550  
550  
640  
640  
640  
770  
770  
770  
770  
10150 10620 10010  
10370 10690 11160 10560  
10370 10690 11160 10560  
15460 16050 15240  
15950 16590 15810  
16380 17010 16220  
16730 17380 16580  
1. The weights shown in this table represents the typical unit operating weights for the  
heating/cooling function indicated with an economizer and exhaust fan installed.  
2. The weights shown represents the typical unit operating weights for the  
heating/cooling function indicated with an economizer, exhaust fan with supply &  
exhaust VFD installed.  
Note:  
3. Roof curb weights include the curb and pedestal.  
Roof Curb and Ductwork  
Note: To assure proper condensate flow during  
operation, the unit (and curb) must be as level as  
possible. The maximum slope allowable for rooftop  
unit applications, excluding SSH_'s, is 4" end-to-  
end and 2" side-to-side. Units with steam coils  
(SSH_'s) must be set level!  
The roof curbs for 20 through 130 Ton units consists of two  
main components; a pedestal to support the unit’s con-  
denser section and a "full perimeter" enclosure to support  
the unit’s air handler section.  
Before installing any roof curb, verify;  
1. That it is the correct curb for the unit,  
If the unit is elevated, a field constructed catwalk around the  
unit is strongly recommended to provide easy access for  
unit maintenance and service.  
2. That it includes the necessary gaskets and  
hardware,  
Recommendations for installing the Supply Air and Return  
Air ductwork joining the roof curb are included in the curb  
instruction booklet. Curb ductwork must be fabricated and  
installed by the installing contractor before the unit is set  
into place.  
3. That the purposed installation location provides  
the required clearance for proper operation.  
4. Insure that the curb is level and square. The top  
surface of the curb must be true to assure an  
adequate curb-to-unit seal.  
Note: For sound consideration, cut only the holes  
in the roof deck for the ductwork penetrations. Do  
not cut out the entire roof deck within the curb  
perimeter.  
Step-by-step curb assembly and installation instructions  
ship with each Trane accessory roof curb kit. Follow the in-  
structions carefully to assure proper fit-up when the unit is  
set into place.  
22  
Installation (Continued)  
Trane's Engineering Bulletin RT-EB-80 provides additional  
information concerning duct design and sound reduction.  
Note: If a “built-up” curb is provided by others,  
keep in mind that these commercial rooftop units  
do not have base pans in the condenser section.  
Pitch Pocket Location  
Note: If this is a REPLACEMENT UNIT keep in mind  
that the CURRENT DESIGN commerical rooftop  
unitsdo not have base pans in the condenser  
section.  
The location of the main supply power entry for S_HF 20  
through 75 Ton rooftop units is located at the bottom right-  
hand corner of the control panel. Figures 3-2A, B & C illus-  
trate the location for the electrical entrance through the  
base in order to enter the control panel. If the power supply  
conduit penetrates the building’s roof beneath this opening,  
it is recommended that a pitch pocket be installed before  
the unit is placed onto the roof curb. The center line dimen-  
sions shown in the illustration below indicates the center  
line of the electrical access hole in the unit base when it is  
positioned on the curb, ±3/8 inch. The actual diameter of  
the hole in the roof should be at least 1/2 inch larger than  
the diameter of the conduit penetrating the roof. This will al-  
low for the clearance variable between the roof curb rail and  
the unit base rail illustrated in Figure 3-5.  
Unit Rigging & Placement  
WARNING  
Heavy Objects!  
Do not use cables (chains or slings) except as shown.  
Each of the cables (chains or slings) used to lift the unit  
must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the  
unit. Lifting cables (chains or slings) may not be of the  
same length. Adjust as necessary for even unit lift.  
Other lifting arrangements may cause equipment or  
property-only damage. Failure to properly lift unit may  
result in death or serious injury. See details below.  
The pitch pocket dimensions listed are recommended to en-  
hance the application of roofing pitch after the unit is set  
into place. The pitch pocket may need to be shifted as illus-  
trated to prevent interference with the curb pedestal.  
Note: Use spreader bars as shown in the diagram.  
Refer to the Installation manual or nameplate for  
the unit weight.Refer to the Installation Instructions  
located inside the side control panel for further  
rigging information.  
1. A Center-of-Gravity illustration and the dimensional data  
is shown in Figure 3-3.  
2. Attach adequate strength lifting slings to all four lifting  
lugs on 20 through 75 Ton units and to all six lifting lugs  
on 90 through 130 Ton units. The minimum distance be-  
tween the lifting hook and the top of the unit should be 7  
feet for 20 through 75 Ton units and 12 feet for 90  
through 130 Ton units. Figure 3-4 illustrates the installa-  
tion of spreader bars to protect the unit and to facilitate a  
uniform lift. Table 3-3 list the typical unit operating  
weights.  
Unit  
S*HF  
S*HF  
Tonnage  
20, 25 & 30  
50 & 55  
“A” Dimension "B" Dimension  
4' 5-9/16"  
9' 5-11/16"  
6' 9-5/8"  
5-9/16"  
5-1/2"  
7-3/16"  
3. Test-lift the unit to ensure it is properly rigged and bal-  
anced, make any necessary rigging adjustments.  
S*HF 40, 60, 70 & 75  
* = All unit functions (SAHF, SEHF, SFHF, SSHF, SLHF and SXHF)  
4. Lift the unit and position it over the curb and pedestal.  
(These units have a continuous base rail around the air  
handler section which matches the curb.  
If a Trane Curb Accessory Kit is not used:  
a. The ductwork can be attached directly to the  
factory-provided flanges around the unit’s supply and  
return air openings. Be sure to use flexible duct  
connections at the unit.  
5. Align the base rail of the unit’s air handler section with  
the curb rail while lowering the unit onto the curb. Make  
sure that the gasket on the curb is not damaged while  
positioning the unit. (The pedestal simply supports the  
unit’s condenser section)  
b. For “built-up” curbs supplied by others, gaskets must  
be installed around the curb perimeter flange and the  
supply and return air opening flanges.  
A cross section of the juncture between the unit and the  
roof curb is shown in Figure 3-5.  
23  
Figure 3-4  
Typical Unit Rigging  
Figure 3-5  
Unit Base & Roof Curb Section  
24  
Installation (Continued)  
General Unit Requirements  
Field Installed Control Wiring  
The checklist listed below is a summary of the steps re-  
quired to successfully install a Commercial rooftop unit.  
This checklist is intended to acquaint the installing person-  
nel with what is required in the installation process. It does  
not replace the detailed instructions called out in the appli-  
cable sections of this manual.  
[ ] Complete the field wiring connections for the constant  
volume controls as applicable. Refer to "Field Installed  
Control Wiring" for guidelines.  
[ ] Complete the field wiring connections for the variable air  
volume controls as applicable. Refer to "Field Installed  
Control Wiring" for guidelines.  
[ ] Check the unit for shipping damage and material short-  
age; file a freight claim and notify Trane office.  
Note: All field-installed wiring must comply with  
NEC and applicable local codes.  
[ ] Verify that the installation location of the unit will provide  
the required clearance for proper operation.  
Requirements for Electric Heat Units  
All SEHF Units (380 minimum voltage) & SEHG units.  
[ ] Assemble and install the roof curb. Refer to the current  
edition of SAHF-IN-5 for 20 through 75 Ton units or  
SXHG-IN-2 for 90 through 130 Ton units.  
[ ] Verify that the power supply complies with the electric  
heater specifications on the unit and heater nameplate.  
[ ] Fabricate and install ductwork; secure ductwork to curb.  
[ ] Inspect the heater junction box and control panel; tighten  
any loose connections.  
[ ] Install pitch pocket for power supply through building  
roof. (If applicable)  
[ ] Check electric heat circuits for continuity.  
[ ] Rigging the unit.  
SEHF Units w/200V or 230V Electric Heat:  
(Requires Separate Power Supply to Heater)  
[ ] Set the unit onto the curb; check for levelness.  
[ ] Connect properly sized and protected power supply wir-  
ing for the electric heat from a dedicated, field- supplied/  
installed disconnect to terminal block 4TB2, or to an op-  
tional unit mounted disconnect switch 4S15.  
[ ] Ensure unit-to-curb seal is tight and without buckles or  
cracks.  
[ ] Install and connect condensate drain lines to each  
evaporator drain connection.  
Requirements for Gas Heat  
[ ] Remove the shipping hardware from each compressor  
assembly.  
[ ] Gas supply line properly sized and connected to the unit  
gas train.  
[ ] Remove the shipping hold-down bolts and shipping chan-  
nels from the supply and exhaust fans ordered with rub-  
ber or spring isolators.  
[ ] All gas piping joints properly sealed.  
[ ] Drip leg Installed in the gas piping near the unit.  
[ ] Check all optional supply and exhaust fan spring isola-  
tors for proper adjustment.  
[ ] Gas piping leak checked with a soap solution. If piping  
connections to the unit are complete, do not pressurize  
piping in excess of 0.50 psig or 14 inches w.c. to prevent  
component failure.  
[ ] Verify that all plastic coverings are removed from the  
compressors.  
[ ] Verify all discharge and liquid line service valves (one per  
circuit) are back seated.  
[ ] Main supply gas pressure adequate.  
[ ] Flue Tubes clear of any obstructions.  
Main Electrical Power Requirements  
[ ] Factory-supplied flue assembly installed on the unit.  
[ ] Verify that the power supply complies with the unit name-  
plate specifications.  
[ ] Connect the 3/4" CPVC furnace drain stubout to a proper  
condensate drain.  
[ ] Inspect all control panel components; tighten any loose  
connections.  
Requirements for Hot Water Heat (SLH_)  
[ ] Connect properly sized and protected power supply wir-  
ing to a field-supplied/installed disconnect and unit  
[ ] Route properly sized water piping through the base of the  
unit into the heating section.  
[ ] Properly ground the unit.  
[ ] Install the factory-supplied, 3-way modulating valve.  
[ ] Complete the valve actuator wiring.  
Note: All field-installed wiring must comply with  
NEC and applicable local codes.  
25  
Installation (Continued)  
Requirements for Steam Heat (SSH_)  
[ ] Use float and thermostatic traps in the system, as re-  
quired by the application.  
[ ] Install an automatic air vent at the top of the return water  
coil header.  
O/A Pressure Sensor and Tubing Installation  
(All units with Statitrac)  
[ ] Route properly sized steam piping through the base of  
the unit into the heating section.  
[ ] O/A pressure sensor mounted to the roof bracket.  
[ ] Install the factory-supplied, 2-way modulating valve  
[ ] Complete the valve actuator wiring.  
[ ] Factory supplied pneumatic tubing installed between the  
O/A pressure sensor and the connector on the vertical  
support.  
[ ] Install 1/2", 15-degree swing-check vacuum breaker(s) at  
the top of each coil section. Vent breaker(s) to theatmo-  
sphere or merge with return main at discharge side of  
steam trap.  
[ ] Field supplied pneumatic tubing connected to the proper  
fitting on the space pressure transducer located in the  
filter section, and the other end routed to a suitable sens-  
ing location within the controlled space.  
[ ] Position the steam trap discharge at least 12" below the  
outlet connection on the coil.  
Figure 3-6A  
Condensate Drain Locations  
26  
Installation (Continued)  
Condensate Drain Connections  
the unit's base rail. To locate and remove the shipping hard-  
ware, refer to Figure 3-7 and the following procedure.  
Each S_HF unit is provided with two or six 1" evaporator  
condensate drain connections (one on each side of the  
unit). Each S_HG unit is provided with two or six 1-1/4"  
evaporator drain connections (one on each side of the unit.)  
1. Remove the four anchor bolts (2 front and 2 rear), used  
to secure the shipping brace to the unit's base rail (two  
assemblies on 40 through 60 Ton units).  
Due to the size of these units, all condensate drain connec-  
tion must be connected to the evaporator drain connec-  
tions. Refer to the appropriate illustration in Figure 3-2 for  
the location of these drain connections.  
2. Remove the three self-tapping screws that secure each  
shipping brace to the compressor mounting rails.  
3. Remove and discard the two 30-1/2" long shipping  
braces for each assembly.  
A condensate trap must be installed due to the drain con-  
nection being on the "negative pressure" side of the fan. In-  
stall the P-Traps at the unit using the guidelines in Figure 3-  
6.  
4. Do not remove the shipping bracket located on top of the  
compressors.  
5. Ensure that the compressor rail assembly is free to move  
on the rubber isolators.  
Pitch the drain lines at least 1/2 inch for every 10 feet of  
horizontal run to assure proper condensate flow. Do not al-  
low the horizontal run to sag causing a possible double-trap  
condition which could result in condensate backup due to  
"air lock".  
Removing Compressor Assembly Shipping Hardware  
(70 & 105 Ton)  
Each manifolded compressor assembly is rigidly bolted to a  
mounting rail assembly. The rail assembly sets on six (6)  
rubber isolators. The assembly is held in place by four (4)  
shipping "Tiedown" bolts. To remove the shipping hardware,  
follow the procedures below:  
Units with Gas Furnace  
Units equipped with a gas furnace have a 3/4" CPVC drain  
connection stubbed out through the vertical support in the  
gas heat section. It is extremely important that the conden-  
sate be piped to a proper drain. Refer to the appropriate il-  
lustration in Figure 3-2 for the location of the drain connec-  
tion.  
1. At each "Tiedown" location (2 front and 2 rear), remove  
and discard the tiedown bolt and the slotted shipping  
spacer located between the compressor rails and the  
unit base rail illustrated in Figure 3-7B, "Tiedown Bolt"  
detail.  
Note: Units equipped with an optional modulating  
gas furnace will likely operate in a condensing  
mode part of the time.  
2. Remove the bolt in each rubber isolator and the slotted  
shipping spacer located between the compressor rails  
and the unit base rail illustrated in Figure 3-7B, "Isolator  
Bolt" detail. Reinstall the bolts at the same location by  
screwing them into the base rail two to three turns only.  
An additional 1-1/4" non-connectable water drain is located  
in the base rail within the heating section.  
Ensure that all condensate drain line installations comply  
with applicable building and waste disposal codes.  
3. Ensure that the compressor rail assembly is free to move  
on the rubber isolators.  
Figure 3-6  
Condensate Trap Installation  
Shipping Fasteners  
Removing Compressor Assembly Shipping Hardware  
(115 and 130 Ton)  
Each manifolded compressor assembly is rigidly bolted to a  
mounting rail assembly. The rail assembly sets on eight (8)  
rubber isolators. The assembly is held in place by six (6)  
"Tiedown Bolts". To remove the shipping hardware, follow  
the procedure below:  
1. At each "Tiedown" location (6), remove and discard the  
tiedown bolt and the slotted shipping spacer located be-  
tween the compressor rails and the unit base rail illus-  
trated in Figure 3-7C, "Tiedown Bolt" detail.  
2. Remove the bolt in each rubber isolator and the slotted  
shipping spacer located between the compressor rails  
and the unit base rail illustrated in Figure 3-7C, "Isolator  
Bolt" detail. Reinstall the bolts at the same location by  
screwing them into the base rail two to three turns only.  
3. Ensure that the compressor rail assembly is free to move  
on the rubber isolators.  
Removing Compressor Assembly Shipping Hardware  
(20 through 60 Ton)  
Each manifolded compressor assembly is rigidly bolted to a  
mounting rail assembly. The rail assembly sets on four (4)  
rubber isolators. The assembly is held in place by two ship-  
ping braces that secure each compressor rail assembly to  
27  
Figure 3-7A  
Removing Scroll Compressor Shipping Hardware for 20 through 60 Ton Units  
Figure 3-7B  
Removing Scroll Compressor Shipping Hardware for 70 through 105 Ton Units  
Figure 3-7C  
Removing Scroll Compressor Shipping Hardward for 115 and 130 Ton Units  
28  
Installation (Continued)  
Removing Supply and Exhaust Fan Shipping Channels  
(Motors >5Hp)  
2. Elevate the fan-and-motor assembly and slide the shipping  
channels out from between the fan assembly rails and the  
unit's base rail.  
Each supply fan assembly and exhaust fan assembly for  
S_HF units shipped with a motor larger than 5 HP is  
equipped with rubber isolators, (as standard), or optional  
spring isolators. Each supply fan assembly and exhaust fan  
assembly for S_HG units is equipped with spring isolators.  
Shipping channels are installed beneath each fan assembly  
and must be removed. To locate and remove these chan-  
nels, refer to Figure 3-8 and use the following procedures.  
3. Lower the fan-and-motor assembly onto the isolators.  
Make sure that the pins at the top of the isolators are en-  
gaged in the corresponding holes on the fan assembly.  
4. Verify that the fan assembly is being supported by the iso-  
lators.  
Rubber Isolators:  
1. Remove and discard the shipping bolts from the fan as-  
Spring Isolators:  
Spring isolators for the supply and/or exhaust fan are  
shipped with the isolator adjusting bolt backed out. Field  
adjustment is required for proper operation. Figure 3-8  
shows isolator locations. To adjust the spring isolators  
use the following procedure.  
sembly rails.  
1. Remove and discard the shipping tie down bolts but  
leave the shipping channels in place during the adjust-  
ment procedure. See Figure 3-8.  
2. Tighten the leveling bolt on each isolator until the fan  
assembly is approximately 1/4" above each shipping  
channel.  
3. Secure the lock nut on each isolator.  
4. Remove the shipping channels and discard.  
29  
Figure 3-8  
Removing Fan Assembly Shipping Hardware (20 through 75 Ton)  
Note: Fan assemblies not equipped with rubber or spring isolators have mounting bolts at the same locations  
and must not be removed.  
(90 through 130 Ton)  
30  
Installation (Continued)  
Figure 3-9  
O/A Sensor & Tubing Installation  
An Outside Air Pressure Sensor is shipped with all units de-  
signed to operate on variable air volume applications or  
constant volume units with 100% modulating exhaust w/  
Stratitrac.  
On VAV systems, a duct pressure transducer (3U60) and  
the outside air sensor is used to control the discharge duct  
static pressure to within a customer-specified parameter.  
On CV & VAV units equipped with 100% modulating ex-  
haust w/Stratitrac, a space pressure transducer (3U62) and  
the outside air sensor is used to control the exhaust fan and  
dampers to relieve static pressure, to within a customer-  
specified parameter, within the controlled space. Refer to  
Figure 3-9 and the following steps to install the sensor and  
the pneumatic tubing.  
1. Remove the O/A pressure sensor kit located inside the  
filter section. The kit contains the following items;  
O/A static pressure sensor with sensor mounting  
bracket  
2' of 3/16" O.D. pneumatic tubing  
Mounting hardware  
2. Using two #10-32 x 1-3/4" screws provided, install the  
sensor's mounting bracket to the factory installed bracket  
(near the filter section).  
3. Using the #10-32 x 1/2" screws provided, install the O/A  
static pressure sensor vertically to the sensor bracket.  
4. Remove the dust cap from the tubing connector located  
below the sensor in the vertical support.  
5. Attach one end of the 2' x 3/16" O.D. factory provided  
pneumatic tubing to the sensor's top port, and the other  
end of the tubing to the connector in the vertical support.  
Discard any excess tubing.  
Units with StatitracTM:  
6. Open the filter access door, and locate the DSP control  
devices illustrated in Figure 3-9. There are three tube  
connectors mounted on the left of the solenoid and  
transducers. Connect one end of the field provided 3/16"  
O.D. pneumatic tubing for the space pressurization con-  
trol to the bottom fitting. Route the opposite end of the  
tubing to a suitable location inside the building. This lo-  
cation should be the largest open area that will not be af-  
fected by sudden static pressure changes.  
31  
Installation (Continued)  
6. Install a pressure regulator at the unit that is adequate to  
maintain 7" w.c. for natural gas while the furnace is oper-  
ating at full capacity.  
Gas Heat Units (SFH_)  
All internal gas piping is factory-installed and pressure leak-  
tested before shipment. Once the unit is set into place, the  
gas supply line must be field-connected to the elbow lo-  
cated inside the gas heat control compartments.  
Note: Gas pressure in excess of 14" w.c. or 0.5 psig  
will damage the gas train.  
Failure to use a pressure regulating device will result in in-  
correct gas pressure. This can cause erratic operation due  
to gas pressure fluctuations as well as damage the gas  
valve.  
WARNING  
Hazardous Gases and Flammable Vapors!  
Exposure to hazardous gases from fuel substances  
have been shown to cause cancer, birth defects or  
other reproductive harm. Improper installation, adjust-  
ment, alteration, service or use of this product could  
cause flammable mixtures. To avoid hazardous gases  
and flammable vapors follow proper installation and set  
up of this product and all warnings as provided in this  
manual. Failure to follow all instructions could result in  
death or serious injury.  
Over sizing the regulator will cause irregular pulsating flame  
patterns, burner rumble, potential flame outages, and pos-  
sible gas valve damage.  
If a single pressure regulator serves more than one rooftop  
unit, it must be sized to ensure that the inlet gas pressure  
does not fall below 7" w.c. with all the furnaces operating at  
full capacity. The gas pressure must not exceed 14" w.c.  
when the furnaces are off.  
When using dry nitrogen cylinders for pressurizing  
units for leak testing, always provide a pressure regula-  
tor on the cylinder to prevent excessively high unit  
pressures. Never pressurize unit above the maximum  
recommended unit test pressure as specified in appli-  
cable unit literature. Failure to properly regulate pres-  
sure could result in a violent explosion, which could re-  
sult in death or serious injury or equipment or prop-  
erty-only-damage. (add when appropriate: See maxi-  
mum recommended unit test pressure below.)  
7. Provide adequate support for all field installed gas piping  
to avoid stressing the gas train and controls.  
8. Leak test the gas supply line using a soap-and-water so-  
lution or equivalent before connecting it to the gas train.  
9. Check the supply pressure before connecting it to the  
unit to prevent possible gas valve damage and the un-  
safe operating conditions that will result.  
Access holes are provided on the unit as illustrated in Fig-  
ure 3-2B to accomodate a side or bottom pipe entry on 20  
through 75 Ton units and Figure 3-2C for bottom entry on  
90 through 130 Ton units. Following the guidelines listed  
below will enhance both the installation and operation of the  
furnace.  
Note: Do not rely on the gas train shutoff valves to  
isolate the unit while conducting gas pressure/leak  
test. These valves are not designed to withstand  
pressures in excess of 14" w.c. or 0.5 psig.  
Connecting the Gas Supply Line to the Furnace Gas  
Train  
Note: In the absence of local codes, the installation  
must conform with the American National Standard  
Z223-1a of the National Fuel Gas Code, (latest  
edition).  
Follow the steps below to complete the installation between  
the supply gas line and the furnace. Refer to Figure 3-10 for  
the appropriate gas train configuration.  
1. To assure sufficient gas pressure at the unit, use Table 3-  
4 as a guide to determine the appropriate gas pipe size  
for the unit heating capacity listed on the unit's name-  
plate.  
1. Connect the supply gas piping using a "ground-joint" type  
union to the furnace gas train and check for leaks.  
2. Adjust the inlet supply pressure to the recommended 7"  
to 14" w.c. parameter for natural gas.  
2. If a gas line already exist, verify that it is sized large  
enough to handle the additional furnace capacity before  
connecting to it.  
3. Ensure that the piping is adequately supported to avoid  
gas train stress.  
3. Take all branch piping from any main gas line from the  
top at 90 degrees or at 45 degrees to prevent moisture  
from being drawn in with the gas.  
4. Ensure that all piping connections are adequately coated  
with joint sealant and properly tightened. Use a piping  
compound that is resistant to liquid petroleum gases.  
5. Provide a drip leg near the unit.  
32  
Installation (Continued)  
Table 3-4  
Sizing Natural Gas Pipe Mains & Branches  
Sizing Natural Gas Pipe Mains & Branches  
Gas Input (Cubic Feet/Hour)*  
Notes:  
1. If more than one unit is served by  
the same main gas supply, consider  
the total gas input (cubic feet/hr.)  
and the total length when determining  
the appropriate gas pipe size.  
2. Obtain the Specific Gravity and  
BTU/Cu.Ft. from the gas company.  
3. The following example demonstrates  
the considerations necessary when  
determining the actual pipe size.  
Gas Supply 1-1/4" 1-1/2"  
Pipe Run (ft) Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe  
2" 2-1/2"  
3"  
4"  
1050 1600 3050 4800 8500 17500  
730 1100 2100 3300 5900 12000  
10  
20  
590  
500  
440  
400  
370  
350  
320  
305  
275  
250  
225  
210  
890 1650 2700 4700 9700  
760 1450 2300 4100 8300  
670 1270 2000 3600 7400  
610 1150 1850 3250 6800  
560 1050 1700 3000 6200  
530  
490  
460  
410  
380  
350  
320  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
125  
150  
175  
200  
990 1600 2800 5800  
930 1500 2600 5400  
870 1400 2500 5100  
780 1250 2200 4500  
710 1130 2000 4100  
650 1050 1850 3800  
Example: A40' pipe run is needed to  
connect a unit with a 500 MBH furnace to a  
natural gas supply having a rating of 1,000  
BTU/Cu.Ft. and a specific gravity of 0.60  
610  
980 1700 3500  
Cu.Ft/Hour = Furnace MBH Input  
Gas BTU/Cu.Ft. X Multiplier (Table 3-1)  
Cu.Ft/Hour = 500  
* Table is based on a specific gravity of 0.60. Use Table 3-1 for  
specific gravity of the local gas supply.  
Table 3 indicates that a 1-1/4" pipe is required.  
Specific Gravity Multipliers  
Specific  
Gravity  
0.50  
Gas Heating Capacity Altitude Correction Factors  
Multiplier  
1.10  
Altitude (Ft.)  
Sea Level  
2001  
2501  
3501  
4501  
5501  
6501  
0.55  
1.04  
To 2000  
To 2500 To 3500 To 4500 To 5500 To 6500 To 7500  
0.60  
1.00  
Capacity  
0.65  
0.96  
Multiplier  
1.00  
.92  
.88  
.84  
.80  
.76  
.72  
Note: Correction factors are per AGA Std. 221.30 - 1964, Part VI, 6.12.  
Local codes may supersede.  
Figure 3-10  
Unit Gas Trains (Natural Gas)  
500 and 850 MBH  
235 and 350 MBH  
33  
Installation (Continued)  
Figure 3-10 (Continued)  
Unit Gas Trains (Natural Gas)  
4. Insert the tube on the flue assembly into the hole located  
in the vertical support for the heat section.  
5. Butt both flue tube sections together and center the pipe  
clamp over joint.  
1000 MBH  
6. Using the pre-punch holes in the flue assembly, exten-  
sion, and the vertical support, install the appropriate  
number of mounting brackets. Refer to Figure 3-11 for  
details.  
Figure 3-11  
Flue Assembly  
Modulating (500 MBH - 1000 MBH)  
Hot Water Heat Units (SLH_)  
Hot water heating coils are factory installed inside the  
heater section of the unit. Once the unit is set into place,  
the hot water piping and the factory provided three way  
modulating valve must be installed. The valve can be in-  
stalled inside the heat section or near the unit. If the valve  
is installed in a remote location, use field supplied wiring to  
extend the control wires from the heater section to the  
valve. Two access holes are provided in the unit base as il-  
lustrated in Figure 3-2.  
Following the guidelines listed below will enchance both the  
installation and operation of the "wet heat" system.  
Figure 3-12 illustrates the recommended piping configura-  
tion for the hot water coil. Table 3-5 list the coil connection  
sizes.  
Note: The valve actuators are not waterproof.  
Failure to protect the valve from moisture may  
result in the loss of heating control.  
Flue Assembly Installation  
1. Locate the flue assembly and the extension (refer to Fig-  
ure 3-11 for extension usage) in the shipwith section of  
the unit.  
1. Support all field-installed piping independently from the  
heating coil.  
2. Install the flue extension onto the flue assembly as  
shown in Figure 3-11.  
2. Use swing joints or flexible connectors adjacent to the  
heating coil. (These devices will absorb the strains of ex-  
pansion and contraction).  
3. Slide the pipe clamp onto the heater flue tube located in-  
side the heater compartment.  
3. All return lines and fittings must be equal to the diameter  
of the "outlet" connection on the hot water coil.  
34  
Installation (Continued)  
use field supplied wiring to extend the control wires from  
the heater section to the valve. Two access holes are pro-  
vided in the unit base as illustrated in Figure 3-2.  
4. Install a "Gate" type valve in the supply branch line as  
close as possible to the hot water main and upstream of  
any other device or takeoff.  
Following the guidelines listed below will enhance both the  
installation and operation of the "wet heat" system.  
Figure 3-13 illustrates the recommended piping configura-  
tions for the steam coil. Table 3-5 list the coil connection  
sizes.  
5. Install a "Gate" type valve in the return branch line as  
close as possible to the return main and down stream of  
any other device.  
6. Install a strainer in the hot water supply branch as shown  
in Figure 3-12.  
Note: The valve actuators are not waterproof.  
Failure to protect the valve from moisture may  
result in the loss of heating control.  
7. Install the 3-way valve in an upright position, piped for  
valve seating against the flow. Ensure that the valve's lo-  
cation lends itself to serviceability.  
1. Support all field-installed piping independently from the  
heating coil.  
8. The Type "W" hot water coil used in SLHF units is self-  
venting only when the tube water velocity exceeds 1.5  
feet per second (fps). If the tube velocity is less than 1.5  
feet per second, either:  
2. Use swing joints or flexible connectors adjacent to the  
heating coil. (These devices will absorb the strains of ex-  
pansion and contraction.)  
a. install an automatic air vent at the top of the return  
header, using the tapped pipe connection;  
3. Install the 2-way valve in an upright position. Ensure that  
the valve's location lends itself to serviceability.  
or,  
4. Pitch the supply and return steam piping downward 1"  
per 10' of run in the direction of flow.  
b. vent the coil from the top of the return header down  
to the return piping. At the vent connection, size the  
return piping to provide sufficient water velocity.  
5. All return lines and fittings must be equal to the diameter  
of the "outlet" connection on the steam coil(s). If the  
steam trap connection is smaller that the coil "outlet" di-  
ameter, reduce the pipe size between the strainer and  
the steam trap connections only.  
9. Install a "Globe" type valve in the Bypass line as shown  
in Figure 3-12.  
Table 3-5  
Connection Sizes for Hot Water & Steam Coil  
(See Note 1)  
6. Install a 1/2" 15 degree swing-check vacuum breaker at  
the top of the return coil header using the tapped pipe  
connection. Position the vacuum breaker as close to the  
coil as possible.  
Heat  
Coil Connections  
Section  
Capacity  
(Note 2)  
High or  
Low Heat  
High or  
(diameter in inches)  
Unit Model  
and Size  
SLH*-20  
to 130  
SSHF-20  
to 30  
Supply  
Return  
Note: Vacuum breakers should have extended lines  
from the vent ports to the atmosphere or connect  
each vent line to the return pipe on the discharge  
side of the steam traps.  
2-1/2"  
2-1/2"  
Low Heat  
High Heat  
3"  
3"  
1-1/4"  
1-1/2"  
7. Install a "Gate" type valve in the supply branch line as  
close as possible to the steam main and upstream of any  
other device.  
SSHF-40  
to 75  
(Note 3)  
SSHG-90  
to 130  
Low Heat  
Low Heat  
(Note 3)  
1-1/2"  
1"  
8. Install a "Gate" type valve in the return branch line as  
close as possible to the condensate return main and  
downstream of any other device.  
Notes:  
1. Type W coils—with center offset headers—are used in  
SLH_ units; Type NS coils are used in SSH_ units.  
2. See Digit 9 of the unit model number to determine the  
heating capacity.  
9. Install a strainer as close as possible to the inlet of the  
control valve and steam trap(s).  
10. Steam trap selection should be based on the maximum  
possible condensate flow and the recommended load  
factors.  
3. SSH_ - 40 to 130 Ton units have multiple headers.  
Steam Heat Units (SSH_)  
11. Install a Float-and-Thermostatic (FT) type trap to main-  
tain proper flow. They provide gravity drains and continu-  
ous discharge operation. FT type traps are required if the  
system includes either;  
Steam heating coils are factory installed inside the heater  
section of the unit. The coils are pitched, within the units, to  
provide the proper condensate flow from the coil. To main-  
tain the designed degree of pitch for the coil, the unit must  
be level.  
a. an atmospheric pressure/gravity condensate return;  
Once the unit is set into place, the steam piping and the  
factory provided two way modulating valve must be in-  
stalled. The valve can be installed inside the heater section  
or near the unit. If the valve is installed in a remote location,  
or,  
b. a potentially low pressure steam supply.  
35  
Installation (Continued)  
13. Install a strainer in each return line before the steam  
trap.  
12. Position the outlet or discharge port of the steam trap at  
least 12" below the outlet connection on the coil(s). This  
will provide adequate hydrostatic head pressure to over-  
come the trap losses and assure complete condensate  
removal.  
14. Trap each steam coil separately as described in steps  
10 and 11 to prevent condensate backup in one or both  
coils.  
40 through 130 Ton units;  
15. In order to prevent condensate backup in the piping  
header suppling both coil sections, a drain must be in-  
stalled utilizing a strainer and a steam trap as illustrated  
in Figure 3-13.  
Utilizes two steam coils stacked together. These two coils  
must be piped in a parallel arrangement. The steps listed  
below should be used in addition to the previous steps. Fig-  
ure 3-13 illustrates the recommended piping configuration  
for the steam coils.  
Figure 3-12  
Hot Water Piping (20 through 75 Ton)  
Hot Water Piping (90 through 130 Ton)  
36  
Figure 3-13  
Steam Coil Piping (20 through 30 Ton Units)  
Steam Coil Piping (40 through 130 Ton Units)  
37  
Installation (Continued)  
handling live electrical components perform these  
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions  
when exposed to live electrical components could result  
Disconnect Switch External Handle  
(Factory Mounted Option)  
Units ordered with the factory mounted disconnect switch  
comes equipped with an externally mounted handle. This  
allows the operator to disconnect power from the unit with-  
out having to open the control panel door. The handle loca-  
tions and its three positions are shown below;  
"ON" - Indicates that the disconnect switch is closed,  
allowing the main power supply to be applied at the  
unit.  
in death or serious injury.  
Verify that the power supply available is compatible with  
the unit's nameplate rating for all components. The avail-  
able power supply must be within 10% of the rated voltage  
stamped on the nameplate. Use only copper conductors to  
connect the 3-phase power supply to the unit.  
"OFF" - Indicates that the disconnect switch is open,  
interrupting the main power supply to the unit  
controls.  
"OPEN COVER/RESET" - Turning the handle to this  
position releases the handle from the disconnect  
switch, allowing the control panel door to be  
opened.  
CAUTION  
Use Copper Conductors Only!  
Unit terminals are not designed to accept other types of  
conductors. Failure to use copper conductors may re-  
sult in equipment damage.  
Electric Heat Units (SEH_)  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage!  
SEHF (20 through 75 Ton) electric heat units operating on  
200/230 volts require two power supplies as illustrated in  
Figure 3-14. Unless the unit was ordered with the optional  
factory mounted non-fused disconnect switches, two field-  
supplied disconnect switches must be installed. The power  
wires for the electric heat is routed into the electric heat  
control panel using the thru-the-base access provided in the  
heating section. Refer to the appropriate illustration in Fig-  
ure 3-2, (Unit Base layout and Electrical Entrance diagram),  
for dimensional data.  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
Once the door has been opened, it can be closed with the  
handle in any one of the three positions outlined above,  
provided it matches the disconnect switch position.  
20 through 75 Ton units operating on 460/575 volts and all  
90 through 130 Ton units require one power entry as illus-  
trated in Figure 3-14.  
Use the information provided in Table 3-7 and the "Power  
Wire Sizing & Protection Device Equations", to determine  
the appropriate wire size and Maximum Over current Pro-  
tection for the heaters/unit.  
The handle can be locked in the "OFF" position. While  
holding the handle in the "OFF" position, push the spring  
loaded thumb key, attached to the handle, into the base  
slot. Place the lock shackle between the handle and the  
thumb key. This will prevent it from springing out of posi-  
tion.  
An overall layout of the field required power wiring is illus-  
trated in Figure 3-14. T insure that the unit's supply power  
wiring is properly sized and installed, follow the  
guildelines outlined below.  
Note: Each power supply must be protected from  
short circuit and ground fault conditions. To  
comply with NEC, protection devices must be sized  
according to the "Maximum Over current  
Protection" (MOP) or "Recommended Dual  
Element" (RDE) fuse size data on the unit  
nameplate.  
Provide grounding for the supply power circuit in the elec-  
tric heat control box.  
Main Unit Power Wiring  
Table 3-6 list the field connection wire ranges for both the  
main power terminal block 1TB1 and the optional main  
power disconnect switch 1S14. Table 3-7 list the compo-  
nent electrical data for 20 through 130 Ton units. The elec-  
trical service must be protected from over current and short  
circuit conditions in accordance with NEC requirements.  
Protection devices must be sized according to the electri-  
cal data on the nameplate. Refer to the "Power Wire Sizing  
& Protection Device Equations", for determining;  
Note: All field installed wiring must conform to NEC guide-  
lines as well as State and Local codes.  
a. the appropriate electrical service wire size based on  
"Minimum Circuit Ampacity" (MCA),  
b. the "Maximum Over current Protection" (MOP)  
device,  
c. the "Recommended Dual Element fuse size" (RDE).  
WARNING  
Live Electrical Components!  
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-  
ing of this product, it may be necessary to work with live  
electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri-  
cian or other individual who has been properly trained in  
38  
Installation (Continued)  
2. If the unit is not equipped with an optional factory in-  
stalled non-fused disconnect switch, a field supplied dis-  
connect switch must be installed at or near the unit in ac-  
cordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC latest  
edition). Refer to the "Power Wire Sizing & Protection De-  
vice Equations" (DSS calculation), for determining the  
correct size.  
3. Location for the electrical service entrance is illustrated in  
Figure 3-2. Complete the unit's power wiring connections  
onto either the main terminal block 1TB1, or the factory  
mounted non-fused disconnect switch 1S14, inside the  
unit control panel. Refer to the customer connection dia-  
gram that shipped with the unit for specific termination  
points.  
4. Provide proper grounding for the unit in accordance with  
local and national codes.  
Figure 3-14  
Typical Field Power Wiring (20 thru 75 Ton)  
39  
Figure 3-14 (Continued)  
Typical Field Power Wiring (90 thru 130 Ton)  
Table 3-6  
Customer Connection Wire Range  
40  
Table 3-7  
Electrical Service Sizing Data (20 through 130 Ton)  
Unit  
Component(s)  
200/60/3, Nominal  
(180-220V Utiliz.)  
230/60/3, Nominal  
(207-253V Utiliz.)  
460/60/3, Nominal  
(414-506V Utiliz.)  
575/60/3, Nominal  
(517-633V Utiliz.)  
RLA (ea) LRA (ea) RLA(ea) LRA (ea) RLA (ea) LRA (ea) RLA (ea) LRA (ea)  
Compressor:  
20  
25  
A & B  
B
A
41.9  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
269  
409  
269  
409  
269  
409  
269  
409  
409  
269  
409  
269  
409  
269  
409  
269  
409  
41.9  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
41.9  
62.8  
251  
376  
251  
376  
251  
376  
251  
376  
376  
251  
376  
251  
376  
251  
376  
251  
376  
18.2  
27.3  
18.2  
27.3  
18.2  
27.3  
18.2  
27.3  
27.3  
18.2  
27.3  
18.2  
27.3  
18.2  
27.3  
18.2  
27.3  
117  
178  
117  
178  
117  
178  
117  
178  
178  
117  
178  
117  
178  
117  
178  
117  
178  
14.6  
21.8  
14.6  
21.8  
14.6  
21.8  
14.6  
21.8  
21.8  
14.6  
21.8  
14.6  
21.8  
14.6  
21.8  
14.6  
21.8  
94  
143  
94  
143  
94  
143  
94  
143  
143  
94  
143  
94  
143  
94  
143  
94  
30  
40  
50  
A & B  
1,2A, 1,2B  
1B & 2B  
1A & 2A  
1,2A, 1,2B  
1,2A, 1,2B  
1,2A, 1,2B  
1,2C  
55  
60  
70  
75  
75  
90  
1,2A, 1,2B  
1,2C  
Hi-Cap 1,2A, 1,2B  
1,2C  
1,2A  
1,2B &  
143  
1,2C  
1,2A  
1,2B  
1,2C  
1,2A &  
1,2B  
1,2C &  
1,2D  
105  
115  
62.8  
409  
62.8  
376  
27.3  
178  
21.8  
143  
62.8  
41.9  
409  
269  
409  
62.8  
41.9  
376  
251  
376  
27.3  
18.2  
178  
117  
178  
21.8  
14.6  
143  
94  
130  
1,2A,B,C,D  
62.8  
Total FLA (1)  
8.2  
62.8  
Total FLA (1)  
8.2  
27.3  
Total FLA (1)  
21.8  
Total FLA (1)  
143  
Condenser Fans:  
20 Ton - 2 fans  
25/30 Ton - 3 fans  
40 Ton - 4 fans  
50 - 75 Ton, 6 fans  
90 Ton, 8 fans  
105 & 115 Ton, 10  
fans  
3.6  
5.4  
7.2  
10.8  
14.4  
24  
2.8  
4.2  
5.6  
8.4  
11.2  
14  
12.3  
16.4  
24.6  
32.8  
12.3  
16.4  
24.6  
32.8  
41  
41  
130 Ton, 12 fans  
Supply Fan Motor  
Horsepower:  
3.0 HP  
5.0 HP  
7.5 HP  
49.2  
FLA (ea.)  
49.2  
FLA (ea.)  
28.8  
FLA (ea.)  
16.8  
FLA (ea.)  
10.4  
16  
24.8  
30.6  
44.9  
57.5  
75  
81  
121  
FLA  
9
14.2  
21.6  
26.6  
40  
51  
65  
74  
105.8  
FLA  
4.5  
7.1  
10.8  
13.3  
20  
25.5  
32.5  
37  
52.9  
FLA  
3.8  
5.8  
8.6  
10.6  
15.6  
20.5  
26  
31  
42.4  
FLA  
10.0 HP  
15.0 HP (2)  
20.0 HP (2)  
25.0 HP (2)  
30.0 HP (2)  
40.0 HP (2)  
Exhaust Fan Motor  
Horsepower:  
1.5 HP  
3.0 HP  
5.0 HP  
7.5 HP  
10.0 HP  
5.5  
10.4  
16  
24.8  
30.6  
44.9  
57.5  
75  
4.8  
9
14.2  
21.6  
26.6  
40  
51  
65  
74  
2.4  
4.5  
7.1  
10.8  
13.3  
20  
25.5  
32.5  
37  
1.9  
3.8  
5.8  
8.6  
10.6  
15.6  
20.5  
26  
15.0 HP  
20.0 HP  
25-HP  
30-HP  
81  
31  
40-HP  
121  
105.8  
52.9  
42.4  
Notes:  
1. “Full load amp” values represents the total condenser fan amps.  
2. Two (2) motors are used on 90 through 130 Ton units.  
41  
Table 3-7 (Continued)  
Electrical Service Sizing Data (20 through 130 Ton)  
Unit  
200/60/3, Nominal  
(180-220V Utiliz.)  
FLA (3)  
230/60/3, Nominal  
(207-253V Utiliz.)  
FLA (3)  
460/60/3, Nominal 575/60/3, Nominal  
(414-506V Utiliz.) (517-633V Utiliz.)  
Component(s)  
Electric Heat  
(SEHFOnly):  
30 Kw  
50 Kw  
70 Kw  
90 Kw  
110 Kw  
130 Kw  
150 Kw  
170 Kw  
190 Kw  
Combustion  
Blower Motor  
(SFHFOnly):  
235, 350, 500 MB  
850 & 1,000 MBh  
FLA (3)  
FLA (3)  
83.3  
138.8  
194.3  
249.8  
305.3  
-n/a-  
-n/a-  
-n/a-  
-n/a-  
FLA  
72.2  
120.3  
168.4  
216.5  
264.6  
-n/a-  
-n/a-  
-n/a-  
-n/a-  
FLA  
36.1  
60.1  
28.9  
48.1  
84.2  
67.4  
108.3  
132.3  
156.4  
180.4  
204.5  
228.5  
FLA  
86.6  
105.9  
125.1  
144.3  
163.6  
182.8  
FLA  
2.1  
2.8  
1.8  
2.4  
0.9  
1.2  
0.7  
1
Unit Tonnage  
20 Ton Std and Hi-Capacity Two  
25 Ton Std and Hi-Capacity  
No. of Compressors Tonnage  
Type  
Scrolls  
Scroll  
Designation  
A& B  
B
9 - Ton  
14 - Ton  
9 - Ton  
One  
One  
Scroll  
A
30 Ton Std and Hi-Capacity Two  
40 Ton Std and Hi-Capacity Four  
50 Ton Std and Hi-Capacity Two  
Two  
14 - Ton  
9 - Ton  
14 - Ton  
9 - Ton  
14 - Ton  
14 - Ton  
9 - Ton  
14 - Ton  
10 - Ton  
15- Ton  
10 - Ton  
15 - Ton  
15 - Ton  
15 - Ton  
10 - Ton  
14 - Ton  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
Scrolls  
A& B  
1A, 1B, 2A, 2B  
1B & 2B  
1A & 2A  
55 Ton Std and Hi-Capacity Four  
1A, 1B, 2A, 2B  
1A, 1B, 2A, 2B  
1A, 1B, 2A, 2B  
1 C & 2C  
1A & 2A, 1B & 2B  
1C, 2C  
60Ton Std and Hi-Capacity  
70 / 75 Ton Std  
Four  
Four  
Two  
Four  
Two  
Two  
Four  
Six  
75 Ton Hi-Capacity  
90 Ton  
1A & 2A  
1 ,2B & 1,2C  
1,2A, 1,2B, 1,2C  
1,2A& 1,2B  
1,2C & 1,2D  
1,2A, 1,2B, 1,2C, 1,2D  
105 Ton  
115 Ton  
Four  
Four  
Eight  
130 Ton  
Note:  
3. "Full load amp" values shown for the electric heat were determined at 480 and 600 volts, respectively.  
42  
Figure 3-15 Power Wire Sizing and Protection Device Equations  
To correctly size the main power wiring for the unit, use the appropriate calculation(s) listed below. Read the load definitions  
that follow and use Calculation #1 for determining the MCA (Minimum Circuit Ampacity), MOP (Maximum Over current Pro-  
tection), and RDE (Recommended Dual Element fuse size) for SAH_ (Cooling Only) units, SXH_ (Extended Casing) units,  
SLH_ and SSH_ (Cooling with Wet Heat) units, and SFH_ (Cooling with Gas Heat) units Use Calculation #2 for SEH_ (Cool-  
ing with electric Heat) units.  
Load Definitions:  
LOAD 1 = CURRENT OF THE LARGEST MOTOR (COMPRESSOR OR FAN MOTOR)  
LOAD 2 = SUM OF THE CURRENTS OF ALL REMAINING MOTORS  
LOAD 3 = CURRENT OF ELECTRIC HEATERS  
LOAD 4 = ANY OTHER LOAD RATED AT 1 AMP OR MORE  
CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER FOR ALL MODES  
- 20 - 40 Ton Units, add 3 FL Amps  
- 50 - 75 Ton Units, add 6 FL Amps  
- 90 - 130 Ton Units, Add 8 FL Amps  
CRANKCASE HEATERS FOR HEATING MODE 460/575V ONLY  
- 20 - 30 Ton Units, Add 1 Amp  
- 40 - 60 Ton Units, Add 2 Amps  
- 70 - 105 Ton Units, Add 3 Amps  
- 115 - 130 Ton Units, Add 4 Amps  
Calculation #1 - SAH_, SXH_, SLH_, SSH_, and SFH_ Units.  
MCA = (1.25 x LOAD 1) + LOAD 2 + LOAD 4  
MOP = (2.25 x LOAD 1) + LOAD 2 + LOAD 4  
Select a fuse rating equal to the MOP value. If the MOP value does not equal a standard fuse size as listed in NEC 240 - 6,  
select the next lower standard fuse rating.  
Note: If selected MOP is less than the MCA, then select the lowest standard maximum fuse size which is equal  
to or larger than the MCA, provided the selected fuse size does not exceed 800 amps.  
RDE = (1.5 x LOAD1) + LOAD2 + LOAD4  
Select a fuse rating equal to the RDE value. If the RDE value does not equal a standard fuse size as listed in NEC 240 - 6,  
select the next higher standard fuse rating.  
Note: If the selected RDE is greater than the selected MOP value, then select the RDE value to equal the MOP  
value.  
Calculation #2 - Rooftop units with Electric Heat (SEH_ 20 - 130 Tons)  
A. Single Source Power (380V, 415V, 460V, and 575V)  
To arrive at the correct MCA, MOP, and RDE values for these units, you must perform two sets of calculations. First calculate  
the MCA, MOP, and RDE values as if the unit was operating in the cooling mode (use the equations given in Calculation #1  
above). Then calculate the MCA, MOP, and RDE values as if the unit was operating in the heating mode as follows. (Keep in  
mind when determining LOADS that the compressors do not operate while the unit is in the heating mode).  
For units using heaters less than 50 kw: MCA = 1.25 x (LOAD 1 + LOAD 2 + LOAD 4) + (1.25 x LOAD 3)  
For units using heaters equal to or greater than 50 kw: MCA = 1.25 x (LOAD 1 + LOAD 2 + LOAD 4) + LOAD 3  
The nameplate MCA value will be the larger of the cooling mode MCA value or the heating mode MCA value calculated  
above.  
MOP = (2.25 x LOAD 1) + LOAD 2 + LOAD 3 + LOAD 4  
The selected MOP value will be the larger of the cooling mode MOP value or the heating mode MOP value calculated above.  
Select a fuse rating equal to the MOP value. If the MOP value does not equal a standard fuse size as listed in NEC 240 - 6,  
select the next lower standard fuse rating.  
Note: If selected MOP is less than the MCA, then select the lowest standard maximum fuse size which is equal  
to or larger than the MCA, provided the selected fuse size does not exceed 800 amps.  
Continued on the Next Page  
43  
Power Wire Sizing and Protection Device Equations (Continued)  
RDE = (1.5 x LOAD 1) + LOAD 2 + LOAD 3 + LOAD 4  
The selected RDE value will be the larger of the cooling mode RDE value or the heating mode RDE value calculated above.  
Select a fuse rating equal to the RDE value. If the RDE value does not equal a standard fuse size as listed in NEC 240 - 6,  
select the next higher standard fuse rating.  
Note: If the selected RDE is greater than the selected MOP value, then select the RDE value to equal the MOP  
value.  
B. Dual Source Power units (200V and 230V)  
These units will have two circuit values shown on the nameplate. The first circuit value will be the refrigeration (cooling mode)  
values calculated using calculation #1 above. The second set of circuit values shown on the nameplate will be for the electric  
heating circuit as follows.  
MCA = (1.25 x LOAD 3)  
MOP = (1.25 x LOAD 3)  
Select a fuse rating for the electric heating circuit that’s equal to the MOP value obtained in the equation above. If the MOP  
value does not equal a standard fuse size as listed in NEC 240 - 6, select the next lower standard fuse rating (see note be-  
low for exception).  
Note: If selected MOP is less than the MCA obtained in the equation above, then select the lowest standard  
maximum fuse size which is equal to or larger than the MCA, provided the selected fuse size does not exceed  
800 amps.  
RDE = LOAD 3  
Select a fuse rating for the electric heating circuit that’s equal to the RDE value. If the RDE value does not equal a standard  
fuse size as listed in NEC 240 - 6, select the next higher standard fuse rating.  
Note: If the selected RDE is greater than the selected MOP value, then select the RDE value to equal the MOP  
value.  
Disconnect Switch Sizing (DSS)  
Calculation #1 - SX, SF, SA, SL, or SS Single Power Source Units  
DSS = 1.15 X (LOAD 1 + LOAD 2 + LOAD 4)  
Calculation #2 - All SEH_ Single Power Source Units  
DSS = 1.15 X (LOAD 3 + Supply Fan FLA + Exhaust Fan FLA)  
PLUS  
DSS = 1.15 X (LOAD 1 + LOAD 2 + LOAD 4)  
Use the larger value of the two calculations to size the electrical service.  
Calculation #3 - SEHF (200/230 Volt) 20 - 75 Ton Dual Power Source Units  
DSS = 1.15 X LOAD3 for the Electric heater AND Calculation #1 for the Refrigeration Components  
44  
Installation (Continued)  
Field Installed Control Wiring  
Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs  
The Rooftop Module (RTM) must have a mode input in or-  
der to operate the rooftop unit. The flexibility of having sev-  
eral system modes depends upon the type of sensor and/or  
remote panel selected to interface with the RTM. An overall  
layout of the various control options available for a Constant  
Volume application, with the required number of conductors  
for each device, is illustrated in Figure 3-16. Figure 3-17 il-  
lustrates the various control options with the required num-  
ber of conductors for a Variable Air Volume application.  
Before installing any connecting wiring between the unit and  
components utilizing a DC analog input\output signal, refer  
to the appropriate illustration in Figure 3-2 for the electrical  
access locations provided on the unit and  
Table 3-9 for conductor sizing guidelines and;  
a. Use standard copper conductor thermostat wire  
unless otherwise specified.  
b. Ensure that the wiring between the controls and the  
unit's termination point does not exceed two and a  
half (2.5) ohms/conductor for the length of the run.  
Note: All field wiring must conform to NEC  
guidelines as well as state and local codes.  
Note: Resistance in excess of 2.5 ohms per  
conductor can cause deviations in the accuracy of  
the controls.  
The various field installed control panels, sensors, switches,  
and contacts discussed in this section require both AC and  
DC consideration. These diagrams are representative of  
standard applications and are provided for general refer-  
ence only. Always refer to the wiring diagram that shipped  
with the unit for specific electrical schematic and connection  
information.  
Table 3-9  
DC Conductors  
Distance from Unit Recommended  
to Control  
000 - 150 feet  
151 - 240 feet  
241 - 385 feet  
386 - 610 feet  
611 - 970 feet  
Wire Size  
22 gauge  
20 gauge  
18 gauge  
16 gauge  
14 gauge  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage!  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
c. Do not run the electrical wires transporting DC  
signals in or around conduit housing high voltage  
wires.  
Controls using 24 VAC  
Units equipped with a Trane Communication Interface (TCI)  
or LonTalk Communication Interface (LCI) option which uti-  
lizes a serial communication link;  
Before installing any connecting wiring, refer to Figure 3-2  
for the electrical access locations provided on the unit and  
Table 3-8 for AC conductor sizing guidelines, and;  
a. Must be 18 AWG shielded twisted pair cable (Belden  
8760 or equivalent).  
a. Use copper conductors unless otherwise specified.  
b. Must not exceed 5,000 feet maximum for each link.  
c. Must not pass between buildings.  
b. Ensure that the AC control wiring between the  
controls and the unit's termination point does not  
exceed three (3) ohms/conductor for the length of  
the run.  
Constant Volume System Controls  
Note: Resistance in excess of 3 ohms per  
conductor may cause component failure due to  
insufficient AC voltage supply.  
Remote Panel w/o NSB (5U56) - BAYSENS010B  
This electronic sensor features four system switch settings  
(Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off) and two fan settings (On and  
Auto) with four system status LED's. It is a manual or auto-  
matic changeover control with dual setpoint capability. It can  
be used with a remote zone sensor BAYSENS017B. Refer  
to Table 3-10 for the Temperature vs Resistance coefficient.  
c. Be sure to check all loads and conductors for  
grounds, shorts, and miswiring.  
Table 3-8  
AC Conductors  
Remote Panel w/ NSB (5U58) - BAYSENS019*  
This 7 day programmable sensor features four periods for  
Occupied\Unoccupied programming per day. If the power is  
interrupted, the program is retained in permanent memory.  
If power is off longer than 2 hours, only the clock and day  
may have to be reset.  
Distance from Unit Recommended  
to Control  
000 - 460 feet  
461 - 732 feet  
733 - 1000 feet  
Wire Size  
18 gauge  
16 gauge  
14 gauge  
The six programming keys located on the front panel allows  
selection of four system modes (Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off),  
two fan modes (On and Auto). It has dual temperature se-  
lection with programmable start time capability.  
d. Do not run the AC low voltage wiring in the same  
conduit with the high voltage power wiring.  
45  
Installation (Continued)  
The occupied cooling setpoint ranges between 40 and 80  
Fahrenheit. The warm-up setpoint ranges between 50 and  
90 degrees Fahrenheit with a 2 degrees deadband. The Un-  
occupied cooling setpoint ranges between 45 and 98  
degrees Fahrenheit. The heating setpoint ranges between  
43 and 96 degrees Fahrenheit.  
system operation, and monitor unit operating status from a  
remote location. Use the installation instructions that  
shipped with the panel to install it, and the unit's field wiring  
diagram to connect it to the unit.  
VAV Changeover Contacts (5K87)  
These contacts are connected to the RTM when daytime  
heating on VAV units with internal or external hydronic heat  
is required. Daytime (occupied) heating switches the system  
to a CV type mode of operation. Refer to the unit wiring dia-  
gram for the field connection terminals in the unit control  
panel. The switch must be rated at 12 ma @ 24 VDC mini-  
mum.  
Two liquid crystal displays (LCD) display zone temperature,  
temperature setpoints, week day, time, and operational  
mode symbols.  
The DIP switches on the subbase are used to enable or dis-  
able applicable functions, i.e.; Morning Warm-up, Econo-  
mizer minimum CFM override during unoccupied status,  
Fahrenheit or Centigrade, Supply air tempering, Remote  
zone temperature sensor, 12/24 hour time display, Smart  
fan, and Computed recovery.  
Constant Volume or Variable Air Volume  
System Controls  
Remote Human Interface Module (5U66)  
During an occupied period, an auxiliary relay rated for 1.25  
amps @ 30 volts AC with one set of single pole double  
throw contacts is activated. See Table 3-10 for the Tempera-  
ture vs Resistance coefficient.  
The remote Human Interface module enables the operator  
to set of modify the operating parameters of the unit using  
it's 16 key keypad and view the operating status of the unit  
on the 2 line, 40 character LCD screen without leaving the  
building. However, the Remote Human Interface module can  
not be used to perform any service functions.  
Constant Volume Zone Panel (5U68) - BAYSENS008B  
This electronic sensor features four system switch settings  
(Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off) and two fan settings (On and  
Auto). It is a manual or automatic changeover control with  
dual setpoint capability.  
One remote panel is designed to monitor and control up to  
four units providing each of the units are equipped with an  
IPCB module. Use the installation instructions that shipped  
with the module to install it, and the appropriate illustrations  
in Figure 3-16 or 3-17 to connect it to the unit.  
Variable Air Volume System Controls  
Remote Panel w/ NSB (5U58) - BAYSENS020B  
This 7 day programmable sensor features four periods for  
Occupied\Unoccupied programming per day. Either one or  
all four periods can be programmed. If the power is inter-  
rupted, the program is retained in permanent memory. If  
power is off longer than 2 hours, only the clock and day may  
have to be reset.  
Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS013C)  
This electronic analog sensor features remote zone sensing  
and timed override with override cancellation. It is used  
when the RTM has been programmed as the source for  
zone temperature control. Refer to Table 3-10 for the Tem-  
perature vs Resistance coefficient.  
Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS014C)  
The front panel allows selection of Occupied/Unoccupied  
periods with two temperature inputs (Cooling Supply Air  
Temperature and Heating Warm-up temperature) per occu-  
pied period. The occupied cooling setpoint ranges between  
40 and 80 Fahrenheit. The warm-up setpoint ranges be-  
tween 50 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit with a 2 degrees  
deadband. The Unoccupied cooling setpoint ranges be-  
tween 45 and 98 degrees Fahrenheit. The heating setpoint  
ranges between 43 and 96 degrees Fahrenheit.  
This electronic analog sensor features single setpoint capa-  
bility and timed override with override cancellation. It is used  
with a Trane Integrated ComfortTM system. Refer to Table 3-  
10 for the Temperature vs Resistance coefficient.  
Remote Zone Sensor (5RT16, 5U57, and 5U69)  
(BAYSENS016A)  
This bullet type analog Temperature sensor can be used for;  
outside air (ambient) sensing, return air temperature sens-  
ing, supply air temperature sensing, remote temperature  
sensing (uncovered), morning warm-up temperature sens-  
ing, and for VAV zone reset. Wiring procedures vary accord-  
ing to the particular application and equipment involved.  
When this sensor is wired to a BAYSENS019* or  
BAYSENS020* Remote Panel, wiring must be 18 AWG  
Shielded Twisted Pair (Belden 8760 or equivalent). Refer to  
Table 3-10 for the Temperature vs Resistance coefficient.  
The liquid crystal display (LCD) displays zone temperature,  
temperature setpoints, week day, time, and operational  
mode symbols.  
The DIP switches on the subbase are used to enable or dis-  
able applicable functions, i.e.; Morning warm-up, econo-  
mizer minimum position override during unoccupied status,  
heat installed, remote zone temperature sensor, 12/24 hour  
time display, and daytime warm-up. Refer to  
Remote Zone Sensor (5RT16, 5U57, and 5U69)  
(BAYSENS017B)  
Table 3-10 for the Temperature vs Resistance coefficient.  
This electronic analog sensor can be used with  
BAYSENS019*, 020*, or 021A Remote Panels. When this  
sensor is wired to a BAYSENS019* or BAYSENS020* Re-  
mote Panel, wiring must be 18 AWG Shielded Twisted Pair  
(Belden 8760 or equivalent). Refer to the specific Remote  
Panel for wiring details.  
During an occupied period, an auxiliary relay rated for 1.25  
amps @ 30 volts AC with one set of single pole double  
throw contacts is activated.  
Remote Panel w/o NSB (5U59) - BAYSENS021A  
The remote panel w/o Night setback has a system switch as  
well as a S/A temperature setpoint indicator, a local sensor,  
and four LED's. These features allow the operator to control  
46  
Installation (Continued)  
4.VOM Mode “D” Priority 4 - Purge:  
-Supply fan - ON  
Remote Minimum Position Potentiometer (5U70)  
(BAYSTAT023A)  
-Inlet Vanes/VFD - 100% (if equipped)  
-Exhaust fan - ON, Exhaust dampers - Open  
-O/A dampers - Open  
-Heat - All stages OFF, Modulating Heat output  
at 0 vdc  
-Occupied/Unoccupied output - Energized  
(Unoccupied)  
The remote minimum position potentiometer is used on  
units with an economizer. It allows the operator to remotely  
set the economizer's minimum position (which controls the  
amount of outside air entering the unit). Use the installation  
instructions that shipped with the potentiometer to install it,  
and the appropriate illustrations in Figure 3-16 or  
3-17 to connect it to the unit.  
-VO Relay - Energized  
-Pre-heater State - Off (if equipped)  
External Auto/Stop Switch (5S67)  
A field supplied single pole single throw switch (5S67) may  
be used to shut down the unit operation. This switch is a bi-  
nary input wired to the RTM. When opened, the unit shuts  
down immediately and can be cancelled by closing the  
switch. Refer to the appropriate illustrations in  
Figure 3-16 or 3-17 for the proper connection terminals in  
the unit control panel. The switch must be rated for 12 ma  
@ 24 VDC minimum.  
5. VOM Mode “E” Priority 5 - Purge with duct pressure  
control:  
-Supply fan - ON  
-Inlet Vanes/VFD - (if equipped) Controlled by  
S/A Pressure Control with supply air pressure high  
limit disabled.  
-Exhaust fan - ON, Exhaust dampers - Open  
-O/A dampers - Open  
-Heat - All stages OFF, Modulating Heat output  
at 0 vdc  
-Occupied/Unoccupied output - Energized  
(Unoccupied)  
-VO Relay - Energized  
VOM Contacts (5K90, 5K91, 5K92, 5K93, 5K94)  
If the unit is equipped with a Ventilation Override Module  
(VOM), (i.e. unit model number digit 21+ is a “N”), a num-  
ber of special functions can be specified by the building  
owner or contractor. These functions can include, but are  
not limited to; (1) Unit Off, (2) Pressurization, (3) Exhaust,  
(4) Purge, and (5) Purge with Duct Pressure Control. They  
are controlled by binary inputs wired to the VOM. These  
functions can be initiated by; a toggle switch, a time clock,  
or an ICSTM output. The switch must be rated for 12 ma @  
24 VDC minimum. The following preset sequences can be  
modified by the customer;  
-Pre-heater State - Off (if equipped)  
"OFF" - will appear in the Ventilation Override screen after  
all VOM binary inputs have been reset (opened).  
Due to codes in some areas, the definitions for some or all  
of the VOM modes may have to be locked into the program  
by the user. Once the definitions are locked, the Ventilation  
Override Module must be replaced in order to reprogram  
that sequence.  
1. VOM Mode “A” Priority 1 - Unit Off:  
-Supply fan - OFF  
Refer to Figure 3-16 & 3-17 for the proper connection termi-  
nals in the unit control panel for each of the VOM initiating  
device’s and the appropriate Programming, Troubleshooting  
Guide (PTG Latest Edition) for programming instructions.  
-Inlet vanes/VFD - 0% (if equipped)  
-Exhaust fan - OFF, Exhaust dampers Closed  
-O/A dampers - Closed  
-Heat - All stages OFF, Modulating Heat output  
at 0 vdc  
-Occupied/Unoccupied output - De-energized  
(Occupied)  
-VO Relay - Energized  
Emergency Override Definitions (with LCI-I module  
installed)  
When an LCI-I module is installed, the user can initiate one  
of five (5) Emergency Override sqeuences that have the fol-  
lowing predefined unit operation:  
-Pre-heater State - Off (if equipped)  
2. VOM Mode “B” Priority 2 - Pressurize:  
-Supply fan - ON  
PRESSURIZE  
Supply Fan - On  
Inlet Vanes - Open (if equipped)  
Exhaust Fan - Off (if equipped)  
Exhaust Dampers - Closed (if equipped)  
OA Dampers - Open  
Heat - All heat stages Off (staged gas and elec.), Hydronic  
heat & Mod Gas Heat output at 0%.  
Occupied/Unoccupied output - Energized  
VO Relay - Energized (with VOM module installed)  
OA Preheater State - Off (with VCM module installed)  
-Inlet Vanes/VFD - 100% (if equipped)  
-Exhaust fan - OFF, Exhaust dampers - Closed  
-O/A dampers - Open  
-Heat - All stages OFF, Modulating Heat output  
at 0 vdc  
-Occupied/Unoccupied output - Energized  
(Unoccupied)  
-VO Relay - Energized  
-Pre-heater State - Off (if equipped)  
3. VOM Mode “C” Priority 3 - Exhaust:  
-Supply fan - OFF  
DEPRESSURIZE  
Supply Fan - Off  
Inlet Vanes - Closed (if equipped)  
Exhaust Fan - On (if equipped)  
Exhaust Dampers -Open (if equipped)  
OA Dampers - Closed  
Heat - All heat stages Off (staged gas and elec.), Hydronic  
heat & Mod Gas Heat output at 0%.  
Occupied/Unoccupied output - De-energized  
VO Relay - Energized (with VOM module installed)  
OA Preheater State - Off (with VCM module installed)  
-Inlet Vanes/VFD - 0% (if equipped)  
-Exhaust fan - ON, Exhaust dampers - Open  
-O/A dampers - Closed  
-Heat - All stages OFF, Modulating Heat output  
at 0 vdc  
-Occupied/Unoccupied output - De-energized  
(Occupied)  
-VO Relay - Energized  
-Pre-heater State - Off (if equipped)  
47  
PURGE  
Emergency Stop Switch (5S71)  
Supply Fan - On  
A normally closed (N.C.) switch (5S71) wired to the RTM  
may be used during emergency situations to shut down all  
unit operations. When opened, an immediate shutdown oc-  
curs. An emergency stop diagnostic is entered into the Hu-  
man Interface and the unit must be manually reset. Refer to  
the appropriate illustrations in Figure 3-16 or 3-17 for the  
proper connection terminals in the unit control panel. The  
switch must be rated for 12 ma @ 24 VDC minimum.  
Inlet Vanes - Open (if equipped)  
Exhaust Fan - On (if equipped)  
Exhaust Dampers - Open (if equipped)  
OA Dampers - Open  
Heat - All heat stages Off (staged gas and elec.), Hydronic  
heat & Mod Gas Heat output at 0%.  
Occupied/Unoccupied output - Energized  
VO Relay - Energized (with VOM module installed)  
OA Preheater State - Off (with VCM module installed)  
Occupied/Unoccupied Contacts (5K86)  
To provide Night Setback control if a remote panel with NSB  
(5U58) was not ordered, a field supplied contact (5K86)  
must be installed. This binary input provides the Occupied/  
Unoccupied status information of the building to the RTM. It  
can be initiated by a time clock, or a Building Automation  
System control output. The relay’s contacts must be rated  
for 12 ma @ 24 VDC minimum. Refer to the appropriate il-  
lustrations in Figure 3-16 or 3-17 for the proper connection  
terminals in the unit control panel.  
SHUTDOWN  
Supply Fan - Off  
Inlet Vanes - Closed (if equipped)  
Exhaust Fan - Off (if equipped)  
Exhaust Dampers - Closed (if equipped)  
OA Dampers - Closed  
Heat - All heat stages Off (staged gas and elec.), Hydronic  
heat & Mod Gas Heat output at 0%.  
Occupied/Unoccupied output - De-energized  
VO Relay - Energized (with VOM module installed)  
OA Preheater State - Off (with VCM module installed)  
Demand Limit Relay (5K89)  
If the unit is equipped with a Generic BAS Module (1U51),  
(i.e. unit model number digit 21+ is a “K”), a normally open  
(N.O.) switch may be used to limit the electrical power us-  
age during peak periods. When demand limit is initiated, the  
mechanical cooling and heating operation is limited to either  
50% or 100%. Demand limit can be initiated by a toggle  
switch closure, a time clock, or an ICSTM control output.  
These contacts must be rated for 12 ma @ 24 VDC mini-  
mum.  
FIRE  
Supply Fan - Off  
Inlet Vanes - Closed (if equipped)  
Exhaust Fan - Off (if equipped)  
Exhaust Dampers - Closed (if equipped)  
OA Dampers - Closed  
Heat - All heat stages Off (staged gas and elec.), Hydronic  
heat & Mod Gas Heat output at 0%.  
Occupied/Unoccupied output - De-energized  
VO Relay - Energized (with VOM module installed)  
OA Preheater State - Off (with VCM module installed)  
Outside Air Sensor (3RT3) - BAYSENS016A  
This device senses the outdoor air temperature and sends  
this information in the form of an analog input to the RTM.  
It's factory installed on units with an economizer, but can be  
field provided/installed and used for informational purposes  
on units without an economizer. Refer to the appropriate il-  
lustrations in Figure 3-16 or 3-17 for the proper connection  
terminals in the unit control panel. Refer to Table 3-10 for  
Temperature vs Resistance coefficient.  
Table 3-10 - Temperature vs. Resistance Coefficient  
The UCM network relies on various sensors located  
throughout the system to provide temperature information in  
the form of an analog input. All of the sensors used have  
the same temperature vs. resistance co-efficient and are  
made from Keystone Carbon D97 material with a 1 degree  
Centigrade tolerance.  
Generic Building Automation System (1U51)  
Resistance  
Resistance  
The Generic Building Automation System (GBAS) module  
allows a non-Trane building control system to communicate  
with the rooftop unit and accepts external setpoints in form  
of analog inputs for cooling, heating, demand limiting, and  
supply air pressure parameters. Refer to Figure 3-18 for the  
input wiring to the GBAS module and the various desired  
setpoints with the corresponding DC voltage inputs for both  
VAV and CV applications.  
Temperature (F)  
(in. 1000 Ohms)  
Temperature (F)  
(in. 1000 Ohms)  
-40  
-30  
-20  
-10  
-5  
0
5
346.1  
241.7  
170.1  
121.4  
103  
87.56  
74.65  
63.8  
54.66  
46.94  
40.4  
34.85  
30.18  
26.22  
22.85  
19.96  
17.47  
15.33  
13.49  
13.15  
12.82  
12.5  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
85  
11.6  
11.31  
11.03  
10.76  
10.5  
10.25  
10  
9.76  
9.53  
9.3  
8.25  
7.33  
5.82  
5.21  
4.66  
3.76  
3.05  
2.5  
2.05  
1.69  
1.4  
1.17  
0.985  
0.83  
10  
15  
20  
25  
30  
35  
40  
45  
50  
55  
60  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
For complete application details of the module, refer to  
Engineering Bulletin UN-PRB001-EN.  
90  
100  
105  
110  
120  
130  
140  
150  
160  
170  
180  
190  
200  
12.19  
11.89  
48  
Figure 3-16A  
Typical Field Wiring Diagram for 20 through 130 Ton CV Control Options  
Refer to Wiring Notes on page 51  
49  
50  
Field Connection Diagram Notes for 20 through 130 Ton CV or VAV Applications  
51  
Figure 3-17A  
Typical Field Wiring Diagram for 20 through 130 Ton VAV Control Option  
Refer to Wiring Notes on page 51  
52  
53  
54  
Table of Contents  
Section One  
Section Four  
About The Manual ...............................................................2  
Literature Change History ................................................2  
Overview of Manual .........................................................2  
Cooling Sequence of Operation ....................................55  
Gas Heating Sequence of Operation.............................56  
Fenwal Ignition System ..................................................56  
Honeywell Ignition System.............................................56  
Modulating Gas Sequence of Operation .......................57  
Flame Failure .................................................................57  
Electric Heat Sequence of Operation ............................58  
Wet Heat Sequence of Operation ..................................58  
Electrical Phasing ..........................................................59  
Voltage Supply and Voltage Imbalance .........................60  
Service Test Guide for Component Operation...............61  
Verifying Proper Fan Rotation .......................................63  
If all of the fans are rotating backwards;........................63  
System Airflow Measurements ......................................63  
Constant Volume Systems.............................................63  
Variable Air Volume Systems .........................................65  
Exhaust Airflow Measurement .......................................66  
TraqTM Sensor Airflow Measurement ...........................66  
Economizer Damper Adjustment ...................................80  
Compressor Start-Up .....................................................82  
Compressor Operational Sounds ..................................83  
Thermostatic Expansion Valves.....................................93  
Charging by Subcooling .................................................93  
Low Ambient Dampers ...................................................93  
Electric, Steam and Hot Water Start-Up ........................94  
Gas Furnace Start-Up ....................................................94  
Two Stage Gas Furnace ................................................95  
Full Modulating Gas Furnace.........................................97  
Limited Modulating Gas Furnace...................................98  
Final Unit Checkout........................................................99  
Section Two  
General Information .............................................................4  
Model Number Description ..............................................4  
Hazard Identification ........................................................6  
Commonly Used Acronyms .............................................6  
Unit Description................................................................6  
Input Devices & System Functions ..................................8  
Constant Volume & Variable Air Volume Units ................8  
Constant Volume (CV) Units ..........................................10  
Variable Air Volume (VAV) Units .................................... 11  
Space Temperature Averaging .......................................12  
Unit Control Modules (UCM) ..........................................12  
Section Three  
Installation..........................................................................14  
Unit Inspection ...............................................................14  
Storage ...........................................................................14  
Unit Clearances .............................................................14  
Unit Dimensions & Weight Information ..........................14  
Roof Curb and Ductwork ...............................................22  
Pitch Pocket Location ....................................................23  
Unit Rigging & Placement ..............................................23  
General Unit Requirements ...........................................25  
Main Electrical Power Requirements.............................25  
Field Installed Control Wiring.........................................25  
Requirements for Electric Heat Units ............................25  
Requirements for Gas Heat ...........................................25  
Requirements for Hot Water Heat (SLH_) .....................25  
Requirements for Steam Heat (SSH_) ..........................26  
O/A Pressure Sensor and Tubing Installation ...............26  
Condensate Drain Connection.......................................27  
Shipping Fasteners ........................................................27  
O/A Sensor & Tubing Installation ...................................31  
Units with Statitrac™; ....................................................31  
Gas Heat Units (SFH_) ..................................................32  
Connecting the Gas Supply Line to the Furnace  
Section Five  
Service & Maintenance....................................................100  
Fan Belt Adjustment .....................................................104  
Scroll Compressor Replacement .................................105  
VFD Programming Parameters ...................................106  
Monthly Maintenance ...................................................107  
Filters............................................................................107  
Cooling Season ............................................................107  
Heating Season............................................................108  
Coil Cleaning ................................................................108  
Final Process ...............................................................109  
Gas Train........................................................................32  
Flue Assembly Installation .............................................34  
Hot Water Heat Units (SLH_) ........................................34  
Steam Heat Units (SSH_) ..............................................35  
Disconnect Switch External Handle...............................38  
Electric Heat Units (SEH_) ............................................38  
Main Unit Power Wiring .................................................38  
Disconnect Switch Sizing (DSS)....................................44  
Field Installed Control Wiring.........................................45  
Controls using 24 VAC ...................................................45  
Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs.......................45  
Constant Volume System Controls ................................45  
Variable Air Volume System Controls ............................46  
Constant Volume or Variable Air Volume System  
Index ............................................................................... 111  
UV ................................................................................... 114  
Warranty ......................................................................... 114  
Controls ..........................................................................46  
Unit Start-Up  
door conditions are suitable for cooling (temperature and  
humidity are within specified setpoints), the RTM will at-  
tempt to maintain the zone temperature without using any  
compressors. If the zone temperature can not be main-  
tained within the setpoint deadband, the RTM sends a cool-  
ing request to the SCM/MCM. The compressor module  
checks the compressor protection circuit before closing  
"Stage 1" (K10 on SCM or K11 on MCM). After the first  
functional stage has started, the compressor module moni-  
tors the saturated refrigerant temperature and closes the  
condenser fan output contact "1A", when the saturated re-  
frigerant temperature rises above the "lower limit" setpoint.  
Cooling Sequence of Operation  
Time delays are built into the controls to increase reliability  
and performance by protecting the compressors and maxi-  
mizing unit efficiency.  
Sequence of Operation  
Compressor Crankcase Heaters  
Each compressor is equipped with a crankcase heater and  
is controlled by a 600 volt auxiliary switch on the compres-  
sor contactor. The proper operation of the crankcase heater  
is important to maintain an elevated compessor oil tempera-  
ture during the "Off" cycle to reduce oil foaming during com-  
pressor starts.  
Units with TraqTM Sensor  
The fresh air enters the unit through the TraqTM Sensor as-  
sembly and is measured by velocity pressure flow rings.  
The velocity pressure flow rings are connected to a pres-  
sure transducer/solenoid assembly. The solenoid is used for  
calibration purposes to compensate for temperature swings  
that could affect the transducer. The Ventilation Control  
Module (VCM) utilizes the velocity pressure input, the RTM  
outdoor air temperature input, and the minimum outside air  
CFM setpoint to modify the volume (CFM) of fresh air enter-  
ing the unit as the measured airflow deviates from setpoint.  
When the compressor starts, the sudden reduction in crank-  
case pressure causes the liquid refrigerant to boil rapidly  
causing the oil to foam. This condition could damage com-  
pressor bearings due to reduced lubrication and could  
cause compressor mechanical failures.  
When power has been "Off" for an extended period, allow  
the crankcase heater to operate a minimum of 8 hours be-  
fore starting the unit.  
When the optional temperature sensor is installed and the  
Preheat function is enabled, the sensor will monitor the  
combined (averaged) fresh air and return air temperatures.  
As this mixed air temperature falls below the Preheat Actu-  
ate Temperature Setpoint, the VCM will activate the preheat  
binary output used to control a field installed heater. The  
output will be deactivated when the temperature rises 5  
above the Preheat Actuate Temperature Setpoint.  
Units without an Economizer  
Upon entering an "occupied" mode of operation, the RTM  
receives input from the remote panel to start the supply fan.  
For constant volume applications, the RTM supply fan con-  
tacts K2 close which energizes the supply fan contactor  
1K16. Units equipped with Inlet Guide Vanes (IGV), the fan  
is delayed until the inlet guide vanes are driven to the full  
closed position. When the supply fan starts, the fan proving  
switch (3S68) closes, signaling the RTM that airflow has  
been established. Inlet Guide Vanes will begin to drive open  
(if equipped), or the VFD will begin to ramp the fan, (if  
equipped).  
When the optional CO sensor is installed and the CO2 Re-  
set is enabled, as the 2CO concentration increases above  
the CO2 Reset Start Value2, the VCM will modify the mini-  
mum outside air CFM setpoint to increase the amount of  
fresh air entering the unit. The setpoint will be adjusted up-  
ward until the CO2 Maximum Reset Value is reached. The  
maximum effective (reset) setpoint value for fresh air enter-  
ing the unit is limited to the systems operating CFM. As the  
CO2 concentration decreases, the effective (reset) setpoint  
value is adjusted downward toward the minimum outside air  
CFM setpoint.  
When a cooling request is sent to the RTM from a zone  
temperature sensor, the RTM evaluates the operating con-  
dition of the system using the supply air temperature input  
and the outdoor temperature input before sending the re-  
quest to the SCM/MCM. Once the request is sent to the  
SCM/MCM, the compressor module checks the compressor  
protection circuit before closing "Stage 1" (K10 on SCM or  
K11 on MCM). After the first functional stage has started,  
the compressor module monitors the saturated refrigerant  
temperature and closes the condenser fan output contact  
"1A", when the saturated refrigerant temperature rises  
above the "lower limit" setpoint.  
Units with an Economizer  
Upon entering an "occupied" mode of operation, the RTM  
receives input from the remote panel to start the supply fan.  
For constant volume applications, the RTM supply fan con-  
tacts K2 close which energizes the supply fan contactor  
1K16. Units equipped with Inlet Guide Vanes (IGV), the fan  
is delayed until the inlet guide vanes are driven to the full  
closed position. When the supply fan starts, the fan proving  
switch (3S68) closes, signaling the RTM that airflow has  
been established. The RTM opens the economizer dampers  
to the specified "minimum position".  
FrostatTM Control  
The compressor module utilizes an evaporator temperature  
sensor (3RT14 & 15), mounted on the suction line of each  
circuit, to protect the evaporator from freezing. If the evapo-  
rator temperature approaches the specified setpoint, adjust-  
able between 25 F and 35 F, the compressor(s) will be  
cycled "off". The compressors will not be allowed to restart  
until the evaporator temperature has risen 10 F above the  
specified cutout temperature and the compressor(s) have  
been off for a minimum of three minutes.  
When a cooling request is sent to the RTM from the zone  
temperature sensor, the RTM evaluates the operating con-  
dition of the system using the supply air temperature input  
and the outdoor temperature input before sending the re-  
quest to the SCM/MCM for mechanical cooling. If the out-  
55  
 
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
Lead/Lag Operation  
When Lead/Lag is enabled, each time the system cycles af-  
ter having stages 1 and 2 "On", "Stage 2" (K11 on SCM or  
K3 on MCM) and the corresponding condenser fan output  
"2A" will start first. The compressor module cycles the  
compressors "On" and "Off" to keep the zone temperature  
within the cooling setpoint deadband. The condenser fans  
are cycled "On" and "Off" to maintain the saturated refriger-  
ant temperature within the specified controlband.  
If the flame rod (4U19) does not detect a flame at the time  
of an initial call for heat or detects a loss of flame during  
operation, it will de-energize the gas valve and the inter-  
lock relay (4K32). The Fenwal ignition control board  
(4U18) will lockout automatically. If a flame failure occurs  
prior to the sequencing time delay relay (4DL6) opening its  
contacts which de-energizes the pre-purge timer (4DL5),  
the sequencing time delay relay (4DL6) will complete its  
timing. When completed, the pre-purge time delay relay  
(4DL5) is de-energized, opening its contacts which discon-  
nects power to the ignition control board (4U18), the se-  
quencing time delay relay (4DL6), and the 2nd stage sole-  
noid on the gas valve (4L15). Once power is removed from  
the ignition control board, it will reset automatically. If a call  
for heat still exists, after approximately 60 seconds, the  
contacts for the sequencing time delay relay (4DL6) will  
close, powering the pre-purge time delay circuit while tim-  
ing open to the combustion blower relay (4K33) and the  
2nd stage solenoid on the gas valve (4L15). The pre-purge  
time delay relay (4DL5) will initiate another ignition se-  
quence. The combustion blower motor will continue to op-  
erate as long as a heating requirement exists and the ser-  
vice switch (4S24) is "On".  
Units equipped with 100% modulating exhaust  
The exhaust dampers are controlled through an Exhaust/  
Comparative Enthalpy Module (ECEM). The ECE module  
receives input form a space transducer and modulates the  
exhaust dampers to maintain the space pressure to within  
the specified setpoint controlband.  
Gas Heating Sequence of Operation  
Standard Two Stage Gas Furnace  
The control system for the rooftop units are wired to ensure  
that the heating and cooling do not occur simultaneously.  
Refer to the wiring diagram that shipped with the unit while  
reviewing the following sequence of operation.  
Once the heating demand has been satisfied, the combus-  
tion blower motor and the ignition control board is de-ener-  
gized.  
Fenwal Ignition System  
(235 & 350 MBH Natural Gas)  
When a heating requirement exists, the Rooftop Module  
(RTM) starts the supply fan and sends a request for heat to  
the Heat Module. The Heat Module closes K11 contacts  
and starts the combustion blower motor (4B11). The com-  
bustion blower motor starts on low speed through the nor-  
mally closed combustion fan relay (4K33) contacts. The  
heat module also closes K12 contacts. Power is then sup-  
plied through the supply air flow switch (4S38), the com-  
bustion air flow switch (4S25), the high limit cutout (4S26),  
and finally through the normally closed sequencing time  
delay (4DL6) contacts to the pre-purge time delay relay  
(4DL5). The Fenwal ignition control board (4U18), the 60  
second sequencing time delay relay (4DL6), and the com-  
bustion blower relay (4K33) will not energize until the pre-  
purge timer (4DL5) closes its contacts. Once closed, the  
Fenwal ignition control board (4U18) energizes the 1st  
stage solenoid on the gas valve (4L15), the interlock relay  
(4K32), and the ignition electrode (4E1). A second set of  
normally open timed closed contacts on the pre-purge  
timer (4DL5) are wired into the 1U50 heat fail input in se-  
ries with a normally closed set of contacts on the interlock  
relay (4K32). When the commonly open contacts on the in-  
terlock relay (4K32) closes, it will maintain an electrical  
path for the ignition control board (4U18) and subsequent  
controls after the pre-purge timer (4DL5) is de-energized  
by the sequencing time delay relay (4DL6). The normally  
open contacts on the pre-purge time delay relay (4DL5)  
will open in the 1U50 heat fail input, preventing the Heat  
Fail diagnostic.  
Propane Gas  
Units that operate on propane gas have one additional con-  
trol that affects the combustion blower motor operation  
when a heating demand has been initiated or satisfied.  
The post purge time delay relay (4DL4) is installed which  
delays the starting of the combustion blower by approxi-  
mately 60 seconds. Once it has timed out, the combustion  
blower motor will start, closing the combustion air flow  
switch (4S25). The ignition sequence will follow the same  
sequence from the combustion airflow switch (4S25) to the  
subsequent controls as a natural gas system.  
Once the heating demand has been satisfied, the Fenwal  
ignition control board (4U18) and the post purge time delay  
relay (4DL4) is de-energized. The combustion blower motor  
will continue to operate for approximately 15 seconds to  
purge the heat exchanger on the "Off" cycle.  
Honeywell Ignition System  
(500 & 850 MBH Natural Gas)  
When a heating requirement exists, the Rooftop Module  
(RTM) starts the supply fan and sends a request for heat to  
the Heat Module. The Heat Module closes K1 contacts and  
starts the combustion blower motor (4B11). The combustion  
blower motor starts on low speed through the normally  
closed combustion blower relay (4K33) contacts.  
The supply airflow switch (4S38) and the combustion air  
switch (4S25) closes. Power is applied through the high  
limit cutout (4S26) to the Honeywell ignition control board  
(4U18). The ignition control board (4U18) starts a pre-purge  
timing cycle. At the end of the pre-purge cycle, the ignition  
transformer (4T7) and the pilot solenoid valve (4L9) are en-  
ergized. This starts a 10 second trial for pilot ignition. When  
the pilot flame is established and sensed by the flame sens-  
ing rod (4U19), stage 1 of the main gas valve (4L7) and the  
60 seconds sequencing time delay relay (4DL6) is ener-  
gized.  
The ignition electrode (4E1) will spark continuously for 4.7  
seconds in an attempt to establish a flame. The flame is  
proven by the flame rod (4U19). The system will operate in  
the low heat mode until there is an additional call for heat  
established by closing the K1 contacts on the Heat Mod-  
ule.  
The 60 second sequencing time delay relay (4DL6) will  
energize the combustion blower relay (4K33) which  
switches the combustion blower motor to high speed and  
energizes the 2nd stage solenoid on the gas valve (4L15).  
56  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
The system will operate in the low heat mode until there is  
an additional call for heat is established by closing the K3  
contacts on the Heat Module.  
eration. As you review the sequence of operations, keep the  
following in mind:  
1. The furnace will not light unless the manual gas valves  
On Variable Air Volume systems, the sequencing time delay  
relay (4DL6) will energize the combustion blower motor re-  
lay (4K33) which switches the combustion blower motor to  
high speed and energizes the 2nd stage solenoid on the  
gas valve (4L7) after approximately 60 seconds.  
are open and the control circuit switch 4S24 is closed.  
2. The control systems are wired to ensure that heating and  
cooling cannot occur simultaneously.  
3. The unit supply fans must run continuously so air flow  
If the flame rod (4U19) does not detect a pilot flame within  
the 10 second trial for ignition period, the control will lock-  
out. If a flame failure occurs during operation, the gas valve  
(4L7), the sequencing time delay relay (4DL6), and the  
combustion blower relay (4K33) is de-energized. The sys-  
tem will purge and attempt to relight the pilot. If a flame is  
not detected after this attempt, the Honeywell ignition con-  
trol (4U18) will lock out. The combustion blower motor will  
continue to operate as long as a heating demand exists and  
the system switch (4S24) is "On".  
switch 4S38 will stay closed.  
4. Modulating Gas heat is available during both occupied  
and unoccupied operation.  
Whenever there is a call for heat, 1U50-K1 energizes and  
combustion blower motor 4B11 begins to operate at High  
speed on the 850 and 1000 MBH heaters. The blower will  
operate on low speed for the 500 MBH. A relay 4K119 in  
parallel with the main gas valve actuator control output, in-  
sures the actuator will be open prior to proof of flame. This  
will force the combustion air actuator 4U82 to the open po-  
sition, causing the auxiliary switch on 4U82 to close. This  
insures complete purging of the combustion chamber during  
the 60 second purge cycle.  
Once the heating demand has been satisfied, the combus-  
tion blower and the Honeywell ignition control board (4U18)  
is de-energized.  
Propane Gas  
Ignition control IC board 4U18 will not energize, however,  
unless the supply air flow switch 4S38, combustion air flow  
switch 4S25, high limit cutout 4S26, the auxiliary switch on  
combustion air actuator 4U82 and the proof of closure  
switch on gas valve 4L22 are closed. These are all part of  
the safety interlock system.  
Units that operate on propane gas after 1990 have two (2)  
additional controls that affect the combustion blower motor  
operation and the sequence of the gas valve operation.  
With the post purge time delay relay (4DL4), the additional  
service switch (4S24), and the additional 115 volt control re-  
lay (4K31) installed, the sequence of operation is as fol-  
lows:  
With all these conditions satisfied, the IC board energizes  
and initiates an internal 60 second pre-purge time delay.  
When the pre-purge period expires, 4U18 energizes both  
the ignition transformer 4T7 and solenoid 4L9 on the inter-  
mittent pilot valve. At that point, 4U18 gives electrode 4E1  
approximately 10 seconds to establish a pilot flame. (The  
presence of this flame is proven by flame rod 4U19.)  
Power is applied to the Honeywell ignition control board  
(4U18) through the high limit switch (4S26). The Honeywell  
ignition control board (4U18) will sequence through its pre-  
purge timing and pilot ignition sequence to The post purge  
time delay relay (4DL4) delays the starting of the combus-  
tion blower motor by approximately 60 seconds. Once the  
timing has elasped, the combustion blower motor will start,  
closing the combustion air switch (4S25).  
If 4U18 does not detect a pilot flame at the end of this pe-  
riod, it will shut down and lock out the ignition / combustion  
circuit.  
Energize the control relay (4K31) and the sequence time  
delay relay (4DL6). 24 volts is applied from the new service  
switch (4S24) through the normally open control relay  
(4K31) contacts to energize the 1st stage solenoid on the  
gas valve (4L7).  
If the pilot is ignited within 10 seconds, the IC board de-en-  
ergizes the ignition transformer 4T7 and electrode 4E1. At  
this point, relay 4K119 will energize, starting the combus-  
tion air actuator and the furnace. The feedback signal from  
the discharge temperature sensor will cause the modulating  
output from the heat module to change the damper position  
as required to maintain the outlet temperature within the de-  
sired band.  
On an additional call for heat, the K3 contacts on the Heat  
Module will close to energize the combustion blower relay  
(4K33) which switches the combustion blower motor to high  
speed and closes its normally open contacts allowing 24  
volts to energize the 2nd stage on the gas valve (4L7).  
Once the heating demand has been satisfied, the  
Flame Failure  
Honeywell ignition control board (4U18) and the post purge  
time delay relay (4DL4) is de-energized. The combustion  
blower motor will continue to operate for approximately 15  
seconds to purge the heat exchanger on the "Off" cycle.  
In the event that IC board 4U18 loses the “proof-of-flame”  
input signal during furnace operation, it will make one at-  
tempt at reignite. If a flame is not reestablished within the  
10 second trial period, 4U18 will shut down and lock out the  
ignition /combustion control circuit. (Combustion blower mo-  
tor 4B11 continues to run as long as a heating requirement  
exists and control circuit switch 4S24 is ON.)  
Modulating Gas Sequence of Operation  
Full and Limited Modulating Gas Furnace  
Once locked out on flame failure, the IC board will not reac-  
tivate the ignition/combustion control circuit until it is reset  
manually. To do this, press the reset button on the front of  
the IC board case.  
The control system for the rooftop units are wired to ensure  
that the heating and cooling do not occur simultaneously.  
Refer to the modulating heat wiring diagram that shipped  
with the unit while reviewing the following sequence of op-  
57  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
A set of relay contacts are available for external use for  
heat fail (Information Only).  
Wet Heat Sequence of Operation  
Electrical circuitry for units with steam or hot water heat is  
limited to the connections associated with the modulating  
valve actuator (4U15) and the freezestat (4S12).  
Note: The modulating gas heaters are factory  
adjusted for the proper air/gas ratio at minimum  
and nameplate rated firing MBH for most areas in  
the country.  
Like the furnaces described earlier, SL/SH control systems  
are wired to ensure that simultaneous heating and cooling  
do not occur. The supply fan will cycle "On" and "Off" with  
each call for heat during both an occupied and unoccupied  
period.  
Electric Heat Sequence of Operation  
The control system for the rooftop units are wired to ensure  
that the heating and cooling do not occur simultaneously.  
Refer to the electric heat wiring diagrams that shipped with  
the unit while reviewing the following sequence of opera-  
tion. As you review the sequence of operations, remember  
these points:  
Whenever there is a call for heat, 1U50-K3 energizes. This  
allows a modulated voltage signal to be sent to the “Wet”  
heat actuator 4U15. Depending on the value of this signal,  
4U15 regulates the flow of steam or hot water through the  
coil by positioning the valve stem at some point between  
fully closed (6 VDC) and fully open (8.5 VDC).  
Whenever there is a call for heat, 1U50-K1 energizes. This  
energizes HEAT 1 contactors 4K34 and 4K35 which, in  
turn, energize two of the six 4HR3 heating elements.  
Freeze Protection  
A freezestat (4S12) is mounted inside the heat section of  
SLH_ and SSH_ units to prevent the “wet” heat coil from  
freezing during the "Off" cycle.  
Note: Electric heater 4HR3 will only energize if both  
of the heat section’s high limit safety controls—  
4S27 and 4S33—are closed.  
If the temperature of the air leaving the heating coils falls to  
40 F, the freezestat's normally-open contacts close, com-  
pleting the heat fail circuit on the UCM. When this occurs:  
1. High limit Switch 4S27 will trip if exposed to a tempera-  
ture of 133 + 5 F, and reset automatically once the tem-  
perature falls to 110 + 5 F. It is mounted on the control-  
box-side of the electric heat element assembly.  
a. The supply fan is turned "Off".  
b. "Wet” heat actuator 4U15 fully opens to allow hot  
water or steam to pass through the heating coil and  
prevent freeze-up.  
2. Linear high limit 4S33 is encased in a capillary that ex-  
tends across the unit’s supply air opening, and is an-  
chored near the bottom of the heat section control box.  
It is designed to trip if the temperature across any 6"  
span of the capillary exceeds 185 + 10 F. Refer to  
Table 5-1.  
c. A "Heat Fail" diagnostic is displayed on the Human  
Interface LCD screen.  
For heating control settings and time delay specifications,  
refer to Table 5-1.  
The HEAT 2 (4K36, 4K37) and HEAT 3 (4K38, 4K39) con-  
tactors are not energized unless the 1st stage bank of heat-  
ing elements already operating are not satisfying the heat-  
ing load.  
58  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
Use the checklist provided below in conjunction with the  
“General Unit Requirement" checklist” to ensure that the  
unit is properly installed and ready for operation. Be sure to  
complete all of the procedures described in this section be-  
fore starting the unit for the first time.  
Units with Low Ambient option without HGBP - 0 F  
Units with Low Ambient option with HGBP - +10 F  
Note: To prevent compressor damage due to no  
refrigerant flow, do not pump the system down with  
the compressor(s) below 7 PSIG under any  
circumstance.  
[ ] Turn the field supplied disconnect switch, located up-  
stream of the rooftop unit, to the "Off" position.  
[ ] Check the supply fan belts for proper tension and the  
fan bearings for sufficient lubrication. If the belts require  
adjustment, or if the bearings need lubricating, refer to  
the Service/Maintenance section of this manual for in-  
structions.  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage!  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
[ ] Inspect the interior of the unit for tools and debris. Install  
all panels in preparation for starting the unit.  
Electrical Phasing  
[ ] Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 to the "Off"  
position. It is located in the secondary of the 1T1 trans-  
former.  
Unlike traditional reciprocating compressors, scroll com-  
pressors are phase sensitive. Proper phasing of the electri-  
cal supply to the unit is critical for proper operation and reli-  
ability.  
[ ] Turn the 24 volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "Off"  
position. It is located in the secondary of the 1T2 & 1T3  
transformers.  
The compressor motor is internally connected for clockwise  
rotation with the incoming power supply phased as  
A, B, C.  
[ ] Turn the "System" selection switch (at the Remote  
Panel) to the "Off" position and the "Fan" selection  
switch (if Applicable) to the "Auto" or "Off" position.  
Proper electrical supply phasing can be quickly determined  
and corrected before starting the unit by using an instru-  
ment such as an Associated Research Model 45 Phase Se-  
quence Indicator and following the steps below:  
[ ] Check all electrical connections for tightness and "point  
of termination" accuracy.  
[ ] Turn the field supplied disconnect switch that provides  
power to terminal block 1TB1 or to the unit mounted dis-  
connect switch 1S14 to the "Off" position.  
[ ] Verify that the condenser airflow will be unobstructed.  
[ ] Check the compressor crankcase oil level. Oil should be  
visible in the compressor oil sight glass. The oil level  
should be 1/2 to 3/4 high in the sight glass with the com-  
pressor "Off".  
[ ] Connect the phase sequence indicator leads to the ter-  
minal block or unit mounted disconnect switch as fol-  
lows;  
[ ] Verify that the compressor discharge service valve and  
the liquid line service valve is back seated on each cir-  
cuit.  
Phase Sequence  
Leads  
Unit Power  
Terminal  
Black (phase A)  
Red (phase B)  
Yellow (Phase C)  
L1  
L2  
L3  
CAUTION  
Compressor Damage!  
Do not allow liquid refrigerant to enter the suction line.  
Excessive liquid accumulation in the liquid lines may  
result in compressor damage.  
[ ] Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch  
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal  
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.  
Compressor service valves must be fully opened before  
start-up (suction, discharge, liquid line, and oil line).  
WARNING  
Do not start the unit in the cooling mode if the ambient tem-  
perature is below the following minimum recommended op-  
erating temperatures:  
Hazardous Voltage!  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
Standard unit with or without HGBP -  
+55 F for 20 & 40 Ton  
+50 F for 25 & 30 Ton  
+45 F for 70 thru 130 Ton  
+40 F for 55 Ton  
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK  
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.  
+35 F for 50 Ton  
+30 F for 60 Ton  
59  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
Voltage Imbalance  
[ ] Observe the ABC and CBA phase indicator lights on the  
face of the sequencer. The ABC indicator light will glow  
if the phase is ABC. If the CBA indicator light glows,  
open the disconnect switch or circuit protection switch  
and reverse any two power wires.  
Excessive three phase voltage imbalance between phases  
will cause motors to overheat and eventually fail. The maxi-  
mum allowable voltage imbalance is 2%. Measure and  
record the voltage between phases 1, 2, and 3 and calcu-  
late the amount of imbalance as follows:  
[ ] Restore the main electrical power and recheck the  
phasing. If the phasing is correct, open the disconnect  
switch or circuit protection switch and remove the phase  
sequence indicator.  
% Voltage Imbalance =  
100 X AV - VD where;  
AV  
AV (Average Voltage) = Volt 1 + Volt 2 + Volt 3  
3
V1, V2, V3 = Line Voltage Readings  
VD = Line Voltage reading that deviates the farthest from  
the average voltage.  
Voltage Supply and Voltage Imbalance  
Voltage Supply  
Electrical power to the unit must meet stringent require-  
ments for the unit to operate properly. Measure each leg  
(phase-to-phase) of the power supply. Each reading must  
fall within the utilization range stamped on the unit name-  
plate. If any of the readings do not fall within the proper tol-  
erances, notify the power company to correct this situation  
before operating the unit.  
Example: If the voltage readings of the supply power  
measured 221, 230, and 227, the average volts would  
be:  
221 + 230 + 227 = 226 Avg.  
3
VD (reading farthest from average) = 221  
The percentage of Imbalance equals:  
WARNING  
Live Electrical Components!  
100 X 226 - 221 = 2.2%  
226  
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-  
ing of this product, it may be necessary to work with live  
electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri-  
cian or other individual who has been properly trained in  
handling live electrical components perform these  
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions  
when exposed to live electrical components could result  
in death or serious injury.  
The 2.2% imbalance in this example exceeds the maximum  
allowable imbalance of 2.0%. This much imbalance be-  
tween phases can equal as much as a 20% current imbal-  
ance with a resulting increase in motor winding tempera-  
tures that will decrease motor life. If the voltage imbalance  
is over 2%, notify the proper agencies to correct the voltage  
problem before operating this equipment.  
60  
Table 4-1  
Service Test Guide for Component Operation  
COMPONENT  
BEING TESTED  
COMPONENT CONFIGURATION  
Supply Exhaust Condenser Heat Stages  
Occ  
VFD Unocc  
Compressor Stage  
Econo Exhaust  
Fan  
Fan  
Fans  
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
Damper Damper IGV Output Relay  
* COMPRESSOR  
20 thru 30 Ton  
A
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
A-Off/B-On Off Off Off K10-Off K11-On N/A  
A-On/B-Off Off Off Off K10-On K11-Off N/A  
N/A Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
N/A Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
B
40 thru 60 Ton  
1A  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-On K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-On K3-Off K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-Off K4-On Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-On  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-On K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
1B  
2A  
2B  
2A-On/2B-Off  
0%  
70 thru 105 Ton  
1A & 1B  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-On K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-On K3-Off K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-Off K4-On Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-On  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-On K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-On/2B-Off  
1C  
2A & 2B  
2C  
115 thru 130 Ton  
1A & 1B  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-On K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-On K3-Off K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-Off K4-On Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-On  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-On K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-On/2B-Off  
1C & 1D  
2A & 2B  
2C & 2D  
** CONDENSER FANS  
20 Ton  
A-2B1  
B-2B2  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
A-On/B-Off Off Off Off  
A-Off/B-On Off Off Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
25 - 30 Ton  
A-2B1  
B-2B2/2B3  
40 Ton  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
A-On/B-Off Off Off Off  
A-Off/B-On Off Off Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
1A-2B1  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off  
2A-On/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off  
2A-Off/2B-On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
1B-2B2  
2A-2B4  
2B-2B5  
50 & 55 Ton  
1A-2B1  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off  
2A-On/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off  
2A-Off/2B-On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
1B-2B2/2B3  
2A-2B4  
2B-2B5/2B6  
60 thru 75 Ton  
1A-2B1  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off  
2A-On/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off  
2A-Off/2B-On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
1B-2B2/2B3  
2A-2B4  
2B-2B5/2B6  
Refer to the next page for applicable notes.  
61  
Table 4-1 (Continued)  
Service Test Guide for Component Operation  
COMPONENT  
COMPONENT CONFIGURATION  
Compressor Stage  
Occ  
VFD Unocc  
BEING TESTED  
Supply Exhaust Condenser Heat Stages  
Econo Exhaust  
Fan  
Fan  
Fans  
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
Damper Damper IGV Output Relay  
(Cont.)  
** CONDENSER FANS  
90 Ton  
1A-2B3/2B14  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-On K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off K11-On K3-Off K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-Off K4-On Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-On/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-On K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-On  
1B-2B1/2B2  
2A-2B6/2B13  
2B-2B4/2B5  
105 & 115 Ton  
1A-2B3/2B14  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-On K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off K11-On K3-Off K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-Off K12-Off K4-On Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-On/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off K11-Off K3-On K12-Off K4-Off Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2A-Off/2B-On  
1B-2B1/2B2/2B19  
2A-2B6/2B13  
2B-2B4/2B5/2B15  
130 Ton  
1A-2B3/2B14  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
1A-On/1B-Off Off Off Off  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-On Off Off Off  
2A-Off/2B-Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
1B-2B1/2B2  
2B19/2B20  
2A-2B6/2B13  
Off  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off  
2A-On/2B-Off  
1A-Off/1B-Off Off Off Off  
2A-Off/2B-On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
2B-2B4/2B5  
2B15/2B21  
SUPPLY FAN  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
Off Off Off  
Off Off Off  
On On N/A  
On Off N/A  
Off On N/A  
90% Select  
5% Select  
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc  
Open  
Closed 100% 100% 100% Default  
EXHAUST FAN  
GAS HEAT (Full Cap.)  
Stage 1  
Open  
Open  
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc  
Open  
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc  
Open  
Stage 2  
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc  
Open  
Full Modulating  
(High Fire Adjustment)  
Full Modulating  
(Low Fire Adjustment)  
Limited Modulating  
(High Fire Adjustment)  
Limited Modulating  
(Low Fire Adjustment)  
ELECTRIC HEAT  
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc  
Open  
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc  
Open  
90% Select  
33% Select  
On On On  
On Off Off  
Off On Off  
Off Off On  
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc  
Open  
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc  
Open  
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc  
Open  
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc  
Open  
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc  
Open  
Closed Closed 100% 100% Unocc  
Open  
Stage 1  
Stage 2  
Stage 3  
Hydronic Heat  
Pre - Heater  
Fresh Air Dampers  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
100% Select  
On N/A N/A  
Off Off Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
Closed Closed Closed 0% Default  
100% Closed Closed 0% Default  
Open  
Exhaust Dampers  
Off  
Off  
All Off  
Off Off Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
100%  
100% Closed 0% Default  
Open  
* - Compressors for the 20 thru 60 Ton units can operate individually or together and in any order while in the SERVICE TEST mode.  
Compressors 1A &1B and compressors 2A & 2B operate simultaneously within their respective circuits on the 70 thru 105 Ton units.  
Compressors 1A & 1B, 1C & 1D, 2A & 2B, 2C & 2D operate simultaneously within their respective circuits on 115 and 130 Ton units.  
Caution:  
Do Not operate the compressors for extended periods of time without the condenser fans, High Head Pressure will develope.  
** - Condenser fan outputs can operate individually or together and in any order while in the SERVICE TEST mode.  
*** - Once the unit has started, refer to the Status Menu in the Human Interface for the OA CFM.  
**** - RTM OCC/UNOCC output in the Service Test Mode must be in the unoccupied mode to open the system VAV boxes and the  
Inlet Guide Vanes or to drive the VFD to 100%.  
62  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
Verifying Proper Fan Rotation  
WARNING  
1. Ensure that the "System" selection switch at the remote  
panel is in the "Off" position and the "Fan" selection  
switch for constant volume units is in the "Auto" position.  
(VAV units do not utilize a "Fan" selection input.)  
Hazardous Voltage!  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
2. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch  
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal  
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.  
c. Interchange any two of the field connected main  
power wires at the unit terminal block 1TB1 or the  
factory mounted disconnect switch 1S14.  
3. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24  
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.  
4. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the  
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to  
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition  
of the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV ap-  
plications for the SERVICE TEST screens and program-  
ming instructions.  
Note: Interchanging "Load" side power wires at the  
fan contactors will only affect the individual fan  
rotation. Ensure that the voltage phase sequence at  
the main terminal block 1TB1 or the factory  
mounted disconnect switch 1S14 is ABC as  
outlined in the "Electrical Phasing" section.  
5. Use Table 4-1 to program the unit Fans for operation by  
scrolling through the displays. All of the Fans (Supply,  
Exhaust, and Condenser fans) can be programed to be  
"On", if desired. Verify proper fan rotation for VFDs with  
bypass.  
If some of the fans are rotating backwards;  
a. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module  
in the unit control panel to stop the fan operation.  
b. Open the field supplied disconnect switch upstream  
of the rooftop unit. Lock the disconnect switch in the  
open position while working at the unit.  
Refer to Figure 4-1 for the condenser fan locations and  
the Human Interface designator.  
6. Once the configuration for the Fans is complete, press  
the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test in  
__Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay  
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after  
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-  
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to  
confirm this choice.  
c. Interchange any two of the fan motor leads at the  
contactor for each fan that is rotating backwards.  
System Airflow Measurements  
Constant Volume Systems  
1. Ensure that the "System" selection switch at the remote  
panel is in the "Off" position and the "Fan" selection  
switch for constant volume units is in the "Auto" position.  
(VAV units do not utilize a "Fan" selection input.)  
WARNING  
Rotating Components!  
2. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch  
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal  
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.  
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-  
ing of this product it may be necessary to measure the  
speed of rotating components. Have a qualified or li-  
censed service individual who has been properly  
trained in handling exposed rotating components, per-  
form these tasks. Failure to follow all safety precau-  
tions when exposed to rotating components could re-  
sult in death or serious injury.  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage!  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
7. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember  
that the delay designated in step 6 must elapse before  
the fans will begin to operate.  
8. Check the supply fan and the exhaust fans (if equipped)  
for proper rotation. The direction of rotation is indicated  
by an arrow on the fan housings. Check the condenser  
fans for clockwise rotation when viewed from the top.  
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK  
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.  
3. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24  
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.  
If all of the fans are rotating backwards;  
a. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module  
in the unit control panel to stop the fan operation.  
4. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the  
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to  
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition  
of the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV ap-  
plications for the SERVICE TEST screens and program-  
ming instructions.  
b. Open the field supplied disconnect switch upstream  
of the rooftop unit. Lock the disconnect switch in the  
open position while working at the unit.  
63  
Figure 4-1  
Condenser Fan Location with Human Interface Designator  
5. Use Table 4-1 to program the Supply Fan for operation  
by scrolling through the displays.  
7. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember  
that the delay designated in step 6 must elapse before  
the fans will begin to operate.  
6. Once the configuration for the Fan is complete, press the  
NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test in  
__Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay  
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after  
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-  
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to  
confirm this choice.  
8. With the system in the SERVICE MODE and the supply  
fan rotating in the proper direction, measure the amper-  
age at the supply fan contactor 1K16 & 1K15 (additional  
contactor for 90 thru 130 Ton units). If the amperage ex-  
ceeds the motor nameplate value, the static pressure is  
less than design and the airflow is too high. If the amper-  
age is below the motor nameplate value, static pressure  
may be too high and CFM may be too low. To determine  
the actual CFM ( 5%);  
WARNING  
Live Electrical Components!  
a. Measure the actual fan RPM  
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-  
ing of this product, it may be necessary to work with live  
electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri-  
cian or other individual who has been properly trained in  
handling live electrical components perform these  
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions  
when exposed to live electrical components could result  
in death or serious injury.  
b. Calculate the Theoretical BHP  
Actual Motor Amps X Motor HP)  
Motor Nameplate Amps  
c. Plot this data onto the appropriate Fan Performance  
Curve in Figure 4-2. Where the two points intersect,  
read straight down to the CFM line.  
64  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
lay before the test is to start. This service test will begin  
after the TEST START key is pressed and the delay  
designated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER  
key to confirm this choice.  
Use this data to assist in calculating a new fan drive if the  
CFM is not at design specifications.  
An alternate method with less accuracy is to measure the  
static pressure drop across the evaporator coil. This can be  
accomplished by;  
WARNING  
Live Electrical Components!  
a. drilling a small hole through the unit casing on each  
side of the coil.  
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-  
ing of this product, it may be necessary to work with live  
electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri-  
cian or other individual who has been properly trained in  
handling live electrical components perform these  
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions  
when exposed to live electrical components could result  
in death or serious injury.  
Note: Coil damage can occur if care is not taken  
when drilling holes in this area.  
b. Measure the difference between the pressures at  
both locations.  
c. Plot this value onto the appropriate pressure drop  
curve in Figure 4-3. Use the data in Table 4-2  
(Component Static Pressure Drops) to assist in  
calculating a new fan drive if the CFM is not at  
design specifications.  
7. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember  
that the delay designated in step 6 must elapse before  
the fan will begin to operate.  
8. With the IGV's/VFD at 100% and the supply fan operat-  
ing at full airflow capability, measure the amperage at the  
supply fan contactor 1K16 & 1K15 (additional contactor  
for 90 through 130 Ton units). If the amperage exceeds  
the motor nameplate value, the static pressure is less  
than design and the airflow is too high. If the amperage  
is below the motor nameplate value, static pressure may  
be too high and CFM may be too low. To determine the  
actual CFM ( 5%);  
d. Plug the holes after the proper CFM has been  
established.  
9. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in  
the unit control panel to stop the fan operation.  
Variable Air Volume Systems  
1. Ensure that the "System" selection switch at the remote  
panel is in the "Off" position.  
a. Measure the actual fan RPM  
b. Calculate the Theoretical BHP  
Actual Motor Amps X Motor HP  
Motor Nameplate Amps  
2. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch  
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal  
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.  
c. Plot this data onto the appropriate Fan Performance  
Curve in Figure 4-4. Where the two points intersect,  
read straight down to the CFM line.  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage!  
Use this data to assist in calculating a new fan drive if the  
CFM is not at design specifications.  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
An alternate method with less accuracy is to measure the  
static pressure drop across the evaporator coil. This can be  
accomplished by;  
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK  
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.  
a. drilling a small hole through the unit casing on each  
side of the coil.  
3. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24  
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.  
Note: Coil damage can occur if care is not taken  
when drilling holes in this area.  
4. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the  
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to  
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition  
of the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV ap-  
plications for the SERVICE TEST screens and program-  
ming instructions.  
b. Measure the difference between the pressures at  
both locations.  
c. Plot this value onto the appropriate pressure drop  
curve in Figure 4-3. Use the data in Table 4-2  
(Component Static Pressure Drops) to assist in  
calculating a new fan drive if the CFM is not at  
design specifications.  
5. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-  
nents for operation by scrolling through the displays;  
Supply Fan  
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)  
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if applicable)  
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)  
d. Plug the holes after the proper CFM has been  
established.  
9. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in  
the unit control panel to stop the fan operation.  
6. Once the configuration for the components is complete,  
press the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test  
in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the de-  
65  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
7. With the exhaust dampers open and the exhaust fan op-  
erating at full airflow capability, measure the amperage at  
the exhaust fan contactor 1K17. If the amperage ex-  
ceeds the motor nameplate value, the static pressure is  
less than design and airflow is too high. If the amperage  
is below the motor nameplate value, static pressure may  
be too high and CFM may be too low. To determine the  
actual CFM ( 5%);  
Exhaust Airflow Measurement  
(Optional with all Units)  
1. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch  
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal  
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.  
WARNING  
a. Measure the actual fan RPM  
Hazardous Voltage!  
b. Calculate the Theoretical BHP  
Actual Motor Amps X Motor HP  
Motor Nameplate Amps  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
Use Tables 4-3 & 4-4 to calculate a new fan drive if the  
CFM is not at design specifications.  
8. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in  
the unit control panel to stop the fan operation.  
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK  
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.  
TraqTM Sensor Airflow Measurement  
(Optional with all units equipped with an economizer)  
2. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24  
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.  
3. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the  
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to  
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition  
of the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV ap-  
plications for the SERVICE TEST screens and program-  
ming instructions.  
1. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the  
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to  
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition  
of the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV ap-  
plications for the SERVICE TEST screens and program-  
ming instructions.  
4. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-  
nents for operation by scrolling through the displays;  
Exhaust Fan  
2. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-  
nents for Economizer operation by scrolling through the  
displays;  
Exhaust Dampers (100% Open, if applicable)  
Fresh Air dampers (100% Open)  
Variable Frequency Drive (100%, if applicable)  
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Default)  
Supply Fan (On)  
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)  
Fresh Air dampers (Selected % Open)  
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if applicable)  
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)  
Outside Air CFM Setpoint  
5. Once the configuration for the components is complete,  
press the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test  
in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay  
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after  
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-  
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to  
confirm this choice.  
Outside Air Pre-Heater Operation (if applicable)  
3. Once the configuration for the components is complete,  
press the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test  
in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay  
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after  
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-  
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to  
confirm this choice.  
WARNING  
Live Electrical Components!  
4. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember  
that the delay designated in step 3 must elapse before  
the fans will begin to operate.  
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-  
ing of this product, it may be necessary to work with live  
electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electri-  
cian or other individual who has been properly trained in  
handling live electrical components perform these  
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions  
when exposed to live electrical components could result  
in death or serious injury.  
5. With the unit operating in the "TEST MODE", the amount  
of outside air flowing through the traq sensor can be view  
by switching to the "STATUS MENU" screen "OA CFM.  
6. Scroll to the "ECONOMIZER ENABLE/ECONOMIZER  
POSITION" screen by pressing the "NEXT" key and read  
the corresponding damper opening percentage (%).  
6. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember  
that the delay designated in step 5 must elapse before  
the fans will begin to operate.  
7. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in  
the unit control panel to stop the unit operation.  
66  
Figure 4-2  
20 & 25 Ton Supply Fan Performance without Inlet Guide Vanes  
8.0  
S_HFC20 & 25 Ton  
Dual 15 X 15 Fans  
Entrance Losses  
- without Inlet Guide Vanes  
- without Evap Coil  
- without Filters  
- without Return Air Dampers  
- without Exhaust Fan  
Fan Curve Limits  
- Minimum Motor HP = 3  
- Maximum Motor HP  
C20 & C25 = 15 HP  
- Maximum RPM  
3 HP - 5 HP = 1100  
7.5 HP - 15 HP = 1655  
- Maximum CFM  
1700 RPM  
1600 RPM  
7.5  
7.0  
6.5  
6.0  
5.5  
5.0  
4.5  
4.0  
3.5  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
0.5  
0.0  
20 HP  
50%  
1500 RPM  
1400 RPM  
60%  
70%  
15 HP  
1300 RPM  
1200 RPM  
10 HP  
7.5 HP  
C20 = 9,000  
C25 = 11,000  
- Maximum Static Pressure  
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.  
1100 RPM  
1000 RPM  
80%  
90%  
5 HP  
900 RPM  
800 RPM  
3 HP  
700 RPM  
600 RPM  
500 RPM  
0
2000  
4000  
6000  
8000  
10000  
CFM  
12000  
14000  
16000  
18000  
20000  
30 Ton Supply Fan Performance without Inlet Guide Vanes  
8.0  
7.5  
S_HFC30  
Dual 18 X 18 Fans  
Entrance Losses  
- without Inlet Guide Vanes  
- without Evap Coil  
- without Filters  
- without Return Air Dampers  
- without Exhaust  
1400 RP M  
7.0  
6.5  
1300 RP M  
6.0  
25 HP  
Fan Curve Limits  
5.5  
50%  
60%  
12 0 0 R P M  
- Minimum Motor HP = 5  
- Maximum Motor HP = 20  
- Maximum RPM = 1379  
- Maximum CFM = 13,500  
- Maximum Static Pressure  
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.  
5.0  
4.5  
20 HP  
1100 RP M  
15 HP  
4.0  
1000 RP M  
3.5  
10 HP  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
0.5  
0.0  
900 RP M  
800 RP M  
7.5 HP  
70%  
5 HP  
700 RP M  
600 RP M  
3 HP  
80%  
90% wocfm  
500 RP M  
0
2000  
4000  
6000  
8000  
10000  
CFM  
12000  
14000  
16000  
18000  
20000  
67  
Figure 4-2 (Continued)  
40, 50 & 55 Ton Supply Fan Performance without Inlet Guide Vanes  
8.0  
7.5  
S_HFC40, C50, C55  
Dual 20 X 20 Fans  
Entrance Losses  
- without Inlet Guide Vanes  
- without Evap Coil  
- without Filters  
1200 RPM  
7.0  
6.5  
40 HP  
- without Return Air Dampers  
- without Exhaust  
Fan Curve Limits  
- Minimum Motor HP = 7.5  
- Maximum Motor HP  
C40, C50 & C55 = 30 HP  
- Maximum RPM  
7.5 - 15 HP = 1141  
20 - 30 HP = 1170  
- Maximum CFM  
6.0  
1100 RPM  
50%  
5.5  
30 HP  
25 HP  
5.0  
4.5  
4.0  
3.5  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
0.5  
0.0  
1000 RPM  
900 RPM  
60%  
70%  
20 HP  
15 HP  
10 HP  
800 RPM  
700 RPM  
C40 = 18,000  
C50 = 22,500  
C55 = 24,000  
7.5 HP  
80%  
90%  
- Maximum Static Pressure  
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.  
5 HP  
600 RPM  
500 RPM  
0
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000 22000 24000 26000 28000 30000  
CFM  
60, 70 & 75 Ton Supply Fan Performance without Inlet Guide Vanes  
1200 RPM  
8.0  
S_HFC60, C70, C75  
Dual 22 X 22 Fans  
Entrance Losses  
- without Inlet Guide Vanes  
- without Evap Coil  
- without Filters  
- without Return Air Dampers  
- without Exhaust  
Fan Curve Limits  
- Minimum Motor HP = 10  
- Maximum Motor HP = 40  
- Maximum RPM = 1130  
- Maximum CFM  
7.5  
1100 RPM  
7.0  
50 HP  
6.5  
1000 RPM  
6.0  
50%  
60%  
5.5  
5.0  
4.5  
4.0  
3.5  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
0.5  
0.0  
40 HP  
900 RPM  
800 RPM  
700 RPM  
30 HP  
20 HP  
C60 = 27,000  
25 HP  
C70 & C75 = 30,000  
- Maximum Static Pressure  
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.  
15 HP  
70%  
80%  
10 HP  
600 RPM  
500 RPM  
7.5 HP  
90% wocfm  
0
3000  
6000  
9000  
12000  
15000  
18000  
CFM  
21000  
24000  
27000  
30000  
33000  
36000  
68  
Figure 4-2 (Continued)  
90, 105, 115, & 130 Ton Supply Fan Performance without Inlet Guide Vanes  
9
1
6
0
0
R
P
M
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
5
0
0
R
P
M
1
4
0
0
R
P
M
1
3
0
0
R
P
M
1
2
0
0
RP  
M
1
1
0
0
R
P
M
1
0
0
0
R
P
M
9
0
0
R
P
M
M
F
C
O
W
%
0
9
0
10000  
20000  
30000  
CFM  
40000  
50000  
60000  
69  
Figure 4-3  
Wet Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20 through 60 Ton Standard Evaporator Coil  
Wet Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20-60 Ton  
Standard Evaporator Coil  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0.09  
0.08  
0.07  
0.06  
0.05  
4000  
5000  
6000  
7000  
8000 9000 10000  
20000  
30000  
Unit Airflow, CFM  
Dry Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20 through 60 Ton Standard Evaporator Coil  
Dry Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20-60 Ton  
Standard Evaporator Coil  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0
0.1  
4
F
H
0.09  
0.08  
*
S
5
2
-
0.07  
0.06  
0
2
F
H
*
S
0.05  
0.04  
3000  
4000  
5000  
6000  
7000  
8000 9000 10000  
20000  
30000  
Unit Airflow, CFM  
70  
Figure 4-3 (Continued)  
Wet Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 70 through 130 Ton Standard Evaporator Coil  
Wet Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 70-130 Ton Ton  
Standard Evaporator Coil  
2
1
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
5
7
F
H
*
S
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
20000  
30000  
40000  
50000  
60000  
Unit Airflow, CFM  
Dry Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 70 through 130 Ton Standard Evaporator Coil  
Dry Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 70-130 Ton Ton  
Standard Evaporator Coil  
2
1
0.9  
0
3
1
0.8  
0.7  
&
5
1
1
F
H
*
S
0.6  
0.5  
5
0
1
F
H
*
S
0.4  
0.3  
0
9
F
H
*
S
0.2  
20000  
30000  
40000  
50000  
Unit Airflow, CFM  
71  
Figure 4-3 (Continued)  
Wet Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20 through 105 Ton Hi-Cap Evaporator Coil  
(Hi-Cap Not Available on 115 & 130 Ton Units)  
Wet Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20-105 Ton Hi-Cap Evaporator Coil  
(Hi-Cap Not Available on 115 & 130 Ton Units)  
2
5
0
1
&
1
0
9
F
0.9  
H
*
S
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0
6
F
H
*
S
0.4  
0.3  
5
2
&
0
2
0.2  
F
H
*
S
0.1  
4000  
6000  
8000  
10000  
20000  
40000  
60000  
Unit Airflow, CFM  
Dry Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20 through 105 Ton Hi-Cap Evaporator Coil  
(Hi-Cap Not Available on 115 & 130 Ton Units)  
Dry Airside Pressure Drop at 0.075 lb/cu.ft. 20-105 Ton Hi-Cap Evaporator Coil  
(Hi-Cap Not Available on 115 & 130 Ton Units)  
2
1
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
4000  
6000  
8000  
10000  
20000  
40000  
Unit Airflow, CFM  
72  
Figure 4-4  
20 & 25 Ton Supply Fan Performance with Inlet Guide Vanes  
8.0  
1700 RP M  
S_HFC20 & 25 Ton  
Entrance Losses  
- with Inlet Guide Vanes  
- without Evap Coil  
- without Filterts  
- without Return Air dampers  
- without Exhaust Fan  
Fan Curve Limits  
- Minimum Motor HP = 3  
- Maximum Motor HP  
C20 & C25 = 15 HP  
- Maximum RPM  
3 HP - 5 HP = 1100  
7.5 HP - 15 HP = 1655  
- Maximum CFM  
C20 = 9,000  
C25 = 11,000  
- Maximum Static Pressure  
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.  
7.5  
7.0  
1600 RP M  
6.5  
20 HP  
15 00 R P M  
50%  
6.0  
5.5  
5.0  
4.5  
4.0  
3.5  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
0.5  
0.0  
60%  
15 HP  
1400 RP M  
13 00 R P M  
70%  
10 HP  
1200 RP M  
1100 RP M  
10 00 R P M  
80%  
7.5 HP  
5 HP  
900 RP M  
800 RP M  
3 HP  
90%wocfm  
700 RP M  
600 RP M  
500 RP M  
0
2000  
4000  
6000  
8000  
10000  
CFM  
12000  
14000  
16000  
18000  
20000  
30 Ton Supply Fan Performance with Inlet Guide Vanes  
8.0  
7.5  
S_HFC30  
Dual 18 X 18 Fans  
Entrance Losses  
7.0  
6.5  
6.0  
5.5  
5.0  
4.5  
4.0  
3.5  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
0.5  
0.0  
1400 RPM  
1300 RPM  
- with Inlet Guide Vanes  
- without Evap Coil  
- without Filters  
- without Return Air Dampers  
- without Exhaust  
Fan Curve Limits  
- Minimum Motor HP = 5  
- Maximum Motor HP = 20  
- Maximum RPM = 1379  
- Maximum CFM = 13,500  
- Maximum Static Pressure  
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.  
25 HP  
50%  
20 HP  
15 HP  
1200 RPM  
1100 RPM  
60%  
70%  
10 HP  
1000 RPM  
7.5 HP  
3 HP  
900 RPM  
800 RPM  
5 HP  
80%  
700 RPM  
600 RPM  
500 RPM  
90% wocfm  
0
4000  
8000  
12000  
16000  
20000  
CFM  
73  
Figure 4-4 (Continued)  
40, 50 & 55 Ton Supply Fan Performance with Inlet Guide Vanes  
8.0  
7.5  
7.0  
S_HFC40, C50, C55  
Dual 20 X 20 Fans  
Entrance Losses  
- with Inlet Guide Vanes  
- without Evap Coil  
- without Filters  
- without Return Air Dampers  
- without Exhaust  
Fan Curve Limits  
- Minimum Motor HP = 7.5  
- Maximum Motor HP  
C40, C50 & C55 = 30 HP  
- Maximum RPM  
7.5 - 15 HP = 1141  
20 - 30 HP = 1170  
- Maximum CFM  
1200 RPM  
6.5  
40 HP  
6.0  
30 HP  
50%  
60%  
1100 RPM  
5.5  
25 HP  
70%  
5.0  
1000 RPM  
20 HP  
4.5  
4.0  
3.5  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
0.5  
0.0  
15 HP  
900 RPM  
80%  
10 HP  
C40 = 18,000  
C50 = 22,500  
C55 = 24,000  
800 RPM  
700 RPM  
7.5 HP  
- Maximum Static Pressure  
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.  
5 HP  
90%  
600 RPM  
500 RPM  
0
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000 22000 24000 26000 28000 30000  
CFM  
60, 70 & 75 Ton Supply Fan Performance with Inlet Guide Vanes  
8.0  
7.5  
7.0  
6.5  
6.0  
5.5  
5.0  
4.5  
4.0  
3.5  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
0.5  
0.0  
1200 RPM  
S_HFC60, C70, C75  
Dual 22 X 22 Fans  
Entrance Losses  
- with Inlet Guide Vanes  
- without Evap Coil  
- without Filters  
- without Return Air Dampers  
- without Exhaust  
Fan Curve Limits  
- Minimum Motor HP = 10  
- Maximum Motor HP = 40  
- Maximum RPM = 1130  
- Maximum CFM  
1100 RPM  
50 HP  
1000 RPM  
900 RPM  
50%  
40 HP  
25 HP  
30 HP  
60%  
70%  
20 HP  
C60 = 27,000  
800 RPM  
700 RPM  
C70 & C75 = 30,000  
- Maximum Static Pressure  
Leaving the Unit = 4.0" w.c.  
15 HP  
10 HP  
600 RPM  
500 RPM  
80%  
7.5 HP  
90% wocfm  
0
3000  
6000  
9000  
12000  
15000  
18000  
CFM  
21000  
24000  
27000  
30000  
33000  
36000  
74  
Figure 4-4 (Continued)  
90, 105, 115, & 130 Ton Supply Fan Performance with Inlet Guide Vanes  
9
M
F
C
O
W
8
%
0
4
7
6
1
0
0
H
P
1
3
0
0
R
P
M
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
H
P
1
2
0
0
6
R
P
M
0
H
P
5
0
1
1
0
0
R
H
P
P
M
4
0
H
P
1
0
0
0
R
P
M
3
0
H
P
9
0
2
0
R
P
M
M
F
5
C
O
H
P
W
2
%
0
0
9
H
P
0
10000  
20000  
30000  
40000  
50000  
60000  
CFM  
75  
Table 4-2  
20 through 75 Ton Component Static Pressure Drops (Inches W.C.)  
Evaporator Coil  
Heating System  
Filters  
Throwaway Perm Bag Cartridge Std With Or  
SSHF/G Std. High Wire And And Roof Without  
Econ.  
CFM  
Nom STD  
High  
Std.  
Capacity  
SFHF/G SEHF/G SLHF/G  
Tons AIR Wet Dry Wet Dry Low High All KW's Low High Low High Fiber Effic. Mesh Prefilter Prefilter Curb Exh. Fan  
4,000 .07 .05 .14 .10  
6,000 .13 .10 .27 .20  
8,000 .21 .16 .43 .32  
9,000 .26 .20 .52 .39  
10,000 .31 .23 .61 .46  
12,000 .41 .31 .82 .63  
5,000 .10 .07 .20 .15  
.02 N/A  
.05 .05  
.09 .09  
.12 .12  
.14 .15  
.20 .22  
.03 N/A  
.02  
.04  
.07  
.09  
.11  
.17  
.03  
——  
.06  
.11  
.13  
.18  
.21  
.04  
.09  
.16  
.22  
.25  
.35  
.07  
——  
.16  
.29  
.32  
.44  
.53  
.11  
.22  
.32  
.44  
.62  
.84  
.16  
.29  
.44  
.62  
.85  
.98  
.16  
.29  
.44  
.53  
.62  
.73  
.85  
1.04  
1.18  
.16  
.29  
.44  
.53  
.62  
.73  
.85  
1.04  
1.18  
.05 .06 .02 .06 .03 .03  
.09 .12 .05 .12 .06 .06  
.15 .19 .10 .20 .09 .09  
.19 .24 .12 .22 .11 .11  
.23 .28 .15 .29 .13 .13  
.33 .40 .22 .42 .15 .15  
.07 .09 .04 .09 .05 .05  
.01  
.02  
.03  
.04  
.05  
.06  
.02  
.3  
.5  
.71  
.83  
.95  
1.19  
.40  
.50  
.66  
.24  
.44  
.68  
.81  
.95  
1.26  
.34  
.44  
.62  
.01  
.02  
.05  
.07  
.10  
.14  
.01  
.03  
.06  
.12  
.15  
.19  
.27  
.03  
20  
6,000 .13 .10 .27 .20 —— .05  
—— —— —— —— —— —— ——  
—— ——  
7,500 .19 .15 .39 .29  
10,000 .31 .23 .61 .46  
11,000 .36 .27 .71 .54  
12,500 .44 .34 .87 .67  
14,000 .52 .40 1.05 .81  
6,000 .15 .11 .20 .15  
9,000 .29 .22 .39 .29  
12,000 .46 .35 .61 .46  
14,000 .59 .45 .78 .60  
15,000 .65 .50 .87 .67  
17,000 .80 .62 1.06 .82  
8,000 .10 .07 .20 .15  
10,000 .14 .11 .29 .21 —— .11  
12,000 .19 .14 .39 .29  
16,000 .31 .23 .61 .46  
17,000 .34 .26 .67 .51 N/A .29  
20,000 .44 .34 .87 .67 N/A .41  
22,000 .51 .39 1.02 .79 N/A .50  
10,000 .17 .13 .23 .17  
14,000 .29 .22 .39 .29  
17,000 .39 .30 .53 .40  
20,000 .51 .39 .68 .52  
24,000 .69 .53 .91 .70  
28,000 .88 .68 1.17 .91  
12,000 .13 .10 .25 .18  
16,000 .20 .16 .39 .29  
20,000 .29 .23 .55 .42  
24,000 .39 .31 .74 .57  
28,000 .50 .39 .95 .73  
30,000 .56 .44 1.06 .82  
12,000 .20 .16 N/A N/A .10 .08  
16,000 .32 .26 N/A N/A .18 .14  
20,000 .46 .37 N/A N/A .27 .21  
22,000 .54 .43 N/A N/A .33 .25  
24,000 .62 .50 N/A N/A .40 .30  
26,000 .70 .56 N/A N/A .47 .32  
28,000 .79 .64 N/A N/A .54 .33  
31,000 .93 .75 N/A N/A .60 .40  
33,000 1.03 .83 N/A N/A .65 .46  
.08 .08  
.14 .15  
.17 .18  
.22 .23  
.28 .29  
.05 .05  
.11 .12  
.20 .21  
.26 .29  
.30 .33  
.39 .42  
.09 N/A  
.14 .17 .09 .18 .09 .09  
.23 .28 .15 .29 .13 .13  
.29 .33 .19 .35 .15 .15  
.33 .42 .24 .42 .19 .19  
.41 .53 .30 .53 .24 .24  
.09 .12 .05 .12 .04 .04  
.19 .24 .12 .22 .07 .17  
.31 .39 .22 .41 .11 .11  
.40 .51 .30 .50 .14 .14  
.45 .57 .33 .52 .16 .16  
.58 .73 .42 .67 .21 .21  
.09 .11 .05 .11 .04 .04  
.03  
.05  
.06  
.08  
.10  
.01  
.02  
.04  
.06  
.07  
.09  
.02  
.04  
.10  
.12  
.19  
.24  
.02  
.07  
.16  
.25  
.30  
.39  
.01  
.10  
.19  
.23  
.30  
.39  
.06  
.15  
.27  
.39  
.43  
.59  
.03  
.95  
.95  
25  
30  
1.06  
1.29  
——  
.34  
.54  
.75  
1.11  
1.34  
——  
.26  
.48  
.75  
.95  
.95  
1.03  
1.20  
.37  
.49  
.61  
.88  
.95  
1.17  
——  
.37  
.56  
.72  
.88  
1.11  
——  
.44  
.63  
.84  
1.06  
1.30  
.31  
.43  
.56  
.87  
.95  
1.22  
——  
.30  
.50  
.68  
.88  
1.17  
——  
.37  
.58  
.82  
—— —— —— —— —— —— ——  
—— ——  
.20 .15  
.34 .26  
.17 .22 .11 .21 .08 .08  
.28 .36 .20 .36 .12 .12  
.31 .39 .22 .41 .13 .13  
.42 .52 .30 .51 .17 .17  
.51 .63 .36 .62 .21 .21  
.13 .16 .07 .15 .04 .04  
.22 .28 .15 .28 .07 .07  
.31 .40 .22 .41 .10 .10  
.42 .52 .30 .51 .12 .12  
.48 .72 .45 .75 .16 .16  
.62 .98 .61 .99 .20 .20  
.10 .13 .06 .11 .05 .05  
.17 .21 .11 .19 .07 .07  
.24 .31 .16 .27 .10 .10  
.33 .42 .22 .39 .11 .11  
.44 .55 .32 .50 .17 .17  
.51 .63 .37 .57 .20 .20  
.10 .13 .06 .11 .05 .05  
.17 .21 .11 .19 .07 .07  
.24 .31 .16 .27 .10 .10  
.29 .37 .19 .33 .12 .12  
.33 .42 .22 .39 .14 .14  
.39 .49 .27 .45 .16 .16  
.44 .55 .32 .50 .17 .17  
.49 .61 .39 .55 .21 .21  
.52 .67 .44 .60 .24 .24  
.10 .13 .06 .11 .05 .05  
.17 .21 .11 .19 .07 .07  
.24 .31 .16 .27 .10 .10  
.29 .37 .19 .33 .12 .12  
.33 .42 .22 .39 .14 .14  
.39 .49 .27 .45 .16 .16  
.44 .55 .32 .50 .17 .17  
.49 .61 .39 .55 .21 .21  
.52 .67 .44 .60 .24 .24  
.03  
.05  
.06  
.08  
.10  
.01  
.03  
.04  
.05  
.07  
.10  
.01  
.02  
.03  
.04  
.06  
.07  
.01  
.02  
.03  
.04  
.04  
.05  
.06  
.07  
.08  
.01  
.02  
.03  
.04  
.04  
.05  
.06  
.07  
.08  
.04  
.10  
.12  
.19  
.23  
.03  
.07  
.12  
.19  
.30  
.39  
.02  
.05  
.10  
.16  
.30  
.34  
.02  
.05  
.10  
.13  
.16  
.23  
.30  
.37  
.42  
.02  
.05  
.10  
.13  
.16  
.23  
.30  
.37  
.42  
.07  
.09  
.11  
.17  
.20  
.05  
.08  
.11  
.17  
.23  
.30  
.07  
.10  
.16  
.23  
.30  
.34  
.07  
.10  
.16  
.20  
.23  
.26  
.30  
.36  
.40  
.07  
.10  
.16  
.20  
.23  
.26  
.30  
.36  
.40  
40  
50/55  
60  
.12 .10  
.26 .20  
.39 .29  
.58 .41  
.73 .58  
.99 .79  
.10 .08  
.18 .14  
.27 .21  
.40 .30  
.48 .33  
.62 .38  
1.06  
——  
——  
.44  
.63  
.84  
1.08  
——  
——  
.37  
.58  
.82  
.95  
.95  
1.06  
1.17  
1.22  
——  
——  
.44  
.63  
.84  
.95  
1.06  
1.17  
1.22  
——  
——  
1.08  
1.23  
1.29  
——  
——  
.37  
.58  
.82  
.95  
1.08  
1.23  
1.29  
——  
——  
70  
12,000 .25 .18 .31 .23  
16,000 .39 .29 .49 .37  
20,000 .55 .42 .69 .53  
22,000 .65 .49 .81 .62  
24,000 .74 .57 .93 .71  
26,000 .84 .65 1.05 .81  
28,000 .95 .73 1.19 .92  
.10 .08  
.18 .14  
.27 .21  
.33 .25  
.40 .30  
.47 .32  
.54 .33  
75  
31,000 1.12 .87 1.40 1.08 .60 .40  
33,000 1.24 .96 1.55 1.20 .65 .46  
76  
Table 4-2 (Continued)  
90 through 130 Ton Component Static Pressure Drops (Inches W.C.)  
Evaporator Coil  
Heating System  
Filters  
Throwaway Perm Bag Cartridge Std With Or  
SSHF/G Std. High Wire And And Roof Without  
Econ.  
CFM  
Nom STD  
High  
Std.  
Capacity  
SFHF/G SEHF/G SLHF/G  
Tons AIR Wet Dry Wet Dry Low High All KW's Low High Low High Fiber Effic. Mesh Prefilter Prefilter Curb Exh. Fan  
27,000 .40 .31 .67 .51 N/A .25  
32,000 .53 .41 .89 .68 N/A .31  
37,000 .67 .52 1.12 .86 N/A .39  
42,000 .82 .63 1.36 1.06 N/A .46  
45,000 .92 .71 1.53 1.19 N/A .52  
31,000 .56 .45 .84 .64 N/A .28  
35,000 .68 .54 1.02 .78 N/A .36  
39,000 .81 .65 1.21 .94 N/A .42  
43,000 .94 .76 1.42 1.10 N/A .45  
46,000 1.05 .84 1.58 1.23 N/A .55  
31,000 .84 .64 N/A N/A N/A .28  
35,000 1.03 .79 N/A N/A N/A .36  
39,000 1.21 .94 N/A N/A N/A .42  
43,000 1.42 1.10 N/A N/A N/A .45  
46,000 1.58 1.23 N/A N/A N/A .55  
.13  
.16  
.23  
.29  
.32  
.17  
.21  
.26  
.30  
.34  
.17  
.21  
.26  
.30  
.34  
.26 .31 .22 .32 .11 .13  
.35 .41 .30 .43 .14 .16  
.45 .52 .40 .55 .17 .19  
.56 .65 .50 .68 .21 .22  
.63 .73 .58 .76 .24 .24  
.33 .39 .29 .40 N/A .13  
.41 .48 .36 .50 N/A .16  
.49 .57 .44 .60 N/A .19  
.57 .66 .53 .71 N/A .22  
.65 .75 .61 .79 N/A .24  
.33 .39 .29 .40 N/A .13  
.41 .48 .36 .50 N/A .16  
.49 .57 .44 .60 N/A .19  
.57 .66 .53 .71 N/A .22  
.65 .75 .61 .79 N/A .24  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
.68  
.84  
1.02  
1.19  
——  
.82  
.65  
.84  
1.04  
1.06  
——  
.80  
——  
——  
——  
.20  
.31  
.41  
.52  
.63  
.22  
.32  
.44  
.54  
.64  
.22  
.32  
.44  
.54  
.64  
90  
.96  
.96  
1.09  
1.22  
——  
.82  
1.12  
1.30  
——  
.80  
105  
.96  
.96  
115/  
130  
1.09  
1.22  
0
1.12  
1.30  
0
Notes:  
1. Static pressure drops of accessory components must be added to external static pressure to enter fan selection tables.  
2. Gas heat section maximum temperature rise of 60 F.  
3. Throwaway filter option limited to 300 ft/min face velocity.  
4. Bag filter option limited to 740 ft/min face velocity.  
5. Horizontal roof curbs assume 0.50" static pressure drop or double the standard roof curb pressure drop, whichever is greater.  
6. No additional pressure loss for model SXHF.  
7. 90 - 130 ton roof curbs adds no pressure drop.  
Table 4-3  
90 through 130 Ton 100% Modulating Exhaust Fan Performance  
STD  
AIR  
CFM  
Negative Static Pressure  
0.75" W.G. 1.00" W.G.  
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP  
0.25" W.G.  
0.50" W.G.  
1.25" W.G.  
1.50" W.G  
24,000  
27,000  
30,000  
33,000  
36,000  
40,000  
477  
530  
7.04  
9.80  
513  
7.95  
561  
9.29  
604 10.66 648 12.15 693 13.83  
558 10.69 597 11.99 639 13.54 677 15.08 716 16.73  
584 13.24 608 14.16 637 15.34 675 16.96 712 18.67 746 20.38  
638 17.42 659 18.39 683 19.53 713 21.02 749 22.88 781 24.75  
693 22.42 711 23.46 732 24.61 756 25.99 786 27.75 818 29.80  
766 30.50 782 31.62 800 32.83 819 34.17 841 35.75 868 37.69  
STD  
AIR  
Negative Static Pressure  
1.75" W.G.  
2.00" W.G.  
2.25" W.G.  
2.50" W.G.  
CFM  
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP  
737 15.66 781 17.54 823 19.45 862 21.42  
756 18.53 796 20.51 835 22.59 874 24.71  
781 22.18 817 24.10 853 26.19 889 28.42  
812 26.63 844 28.57 877 30.61 910 32.79  
848 31.85 877 33.89 905 35.98 935 38.14  
897 39.94 926 42.24 952 44.50 977 46.77  
24,000  
27,000  
30,000  
33,000  
36,000  
40,000  
Note:  
Blocked areas identify non-standard drive selections.  
77  
Table 4-3 (Continued)  
20 through 75 Ton 100% Modulating Exhaust Fan Performance  
Negative Static Pressure  
Cfm 0.25" W.G. 0.50" W.G. 0.75" W.G. 1.00" W.G. 1.25" W.G. 1.50" W.G. 1.75" W.G. 2.00" W.G.  
Std.  
Air RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP  
S*HF-C20  
S*HF-C25  
4,000  
6,000  
8,000  
10,000  
4,000  
6,000  
399 0.38 538 0.75 640 1.08 730 1.45 811 1.87 882 2.34 947 2.88  
453 0.74 570 1.17 675 1.65 765 2.22 845 2.78  
547 1.59 619 1.81 711 2.48 797 3.01  
640 2.79  
399 0.38 538 0.75 640 1.08 730 1.45 811 1.87 882 2.34 947 2.88 1017 3.55  
453 0.74 570 1.17 675 1.65 765 2.22 845 2.78 912 3.27 975 3.77 1036 4.30  
547 1.59 619 1.81 711 2.48 797 3.01 876 3.66 947 4.40  
8,000  
10,000  
12,000  
4,000  
6,000  
8,000  
10,000  
12,000  
14,000  
7,500  
640 2.79 712 3.25 767 3.48 837 4.26 911 5.04  
737 4.44  
S*HF-C30  
399 0.38 538 0.75 640 1.08 730 1.45 811 1.87 882 2.34 947 2.88 1017 3.55  
453 0.74 570 1.17 675 1.65 765 2.22 845 2.78 912 3.27 975 3.77 1036 4.30  
547 1.59 619 1.81 711 2.48 797 3.01 876 3.66 947 4.40 1013 5.18 1075 5.94  
640 2.79 712 3.25 767 3.48 837 4.26 911 5.04 980 5.70 1045 6.46 1106 7.31  
737 4.44 806 5.22 860 5.64 905 5.89 956 6.49  
837 6.67  
S*HF-C40  
S*HF-C50  
S*HF-C55  
S*HF-C60  
334 0.75 438 1.21 535 1.77 616 2.35 686 2.98 750 3.64 809 4.34 864 5.06  
362 1.09 449 1.57 536 2.16 618 2.84 689 3.52 753 4.24 812 4.99 867 5.77  
435 2.19 496 2.70 563 3.35 628 4.04 693 4.83 757 5.71 817 6.63 873 8.53  
486 3.22 542 3.86 594 4.47 653 5.25 707 6.04 763 6.91 819 7.86 874 8.89  
537 4.55 592 5.35 636 6.00 683 6.74 735 7.64 783 8.53 831 9.47 880 10.48  
362 1.09 449 1.57 536 2.16 618 2.84 689 3.52 753 4.24 812 4.99 867 5.77  
435 2.19 496 2.70 563 3.35 628 4.04 693 4.83 757 5.71 817 6.63 873 7.53  
511 3.85 567 4.56 614 5.18 667 5.96 720 6.80 771 7.66 824 8.60 876 9.63  
590 6.21 642 7.16 685 7.97 724 8.69 766 9.54 812 10.54 856 11.55 898 12.56  
644 8.26 692 9.35 735 10.33 772 11.17 807 11.97 844 12.91 885 14.00 926 15.13  
386 1.40 463 1.90 540 2.48 618 3.18 691 3.94 755 4.70 814 5.48 869 6.30  
461 2.67 518 3.23 578 3.88 639 4.61 698 5.39 759 6.26 818 8.22 874 8.21  
537 4.55 592 5.35 636 6.00 683 6.74 735 7.64 783 8.53 831 9.47 880 10.48  
617 7.19 667 8.21 710 9.10 747 9.87 785 10.68 827 11.66 870 12.73 911 13.80  
685 10.08 731 11.26 772 12.36 809 13.33 842 14.20 874 15.08 910 16.10 948 17.28  
351 1.49 423 2.09 502 3.00 572 4.02 634 5.07 690 6.09 740 7.04 784 7.91  
412 2.68 460 3.15 521 3.96 585 5.02 646 6.24 702 7.53 754 8.83 801 10.14  
478 4.41 516 4.88 557 5.54 607 6.49 662 7.66 715 9.01 766 10.48 814 12.01  
547 6.75 578 7.36 612 7.92 647 8.71 688 9.77 735 11.03 781 12.46 827 14.03  
617 9.83 644 10.59 672 11.22 702 11.88 732 12.77 766 13.89 805 15.22  
9,000  
12,000  
14,000  
16,000  
9,000  
12,000  
15,000  
18,000  
20,000  
10,000  
13,000  
16,000  
19,000  
21,500  
12,000  
C70 & -C75 15,000  
18,000  
21,000  
24,000  
Note:  
Blocked areas of table identify nonstandard drive selections.  
78  
Table 4-4  
20 through 75 Ton 50% Modulating Exhaust Fan Performance  
Negative Static Pressure  
0.60" W.G. 0.80" W.G.  
Cfm 0.20" W.G.  
Std.  
0.40" W.G.  
1.00" W.G.  
1.20" W.G. 1.40" W.G.  
Air  
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP  
364 0.17 487 0.30 582 0.45 658 0.58 731 0.73 797 0.90 856 1.08  
435 0.36 522 0.51 614 0.67 694 0.88 765 1.11 830 1.34 886 1.54  
529 0.76 592 0.86 654 1.03 728 1.29 797 1.51 861 1.77 919 2.05  
623 1.32 687 1.56 735 1.67 778 1.79 836 2.13 896 2.45 953 2.72  
722 2.13 779 2.47 830 2.72 890 2.86 905 2.96  
S*HF-C20  
S*HF-C25  
2,000  
3,000  
4,000  
5,000  
6,000  
2,000  
3,000  
4,000  
5,000  
6,000  
7,000  
3,000  
5,000  
7,000  
9,000  
11,000  
3,000  
5,000  
7,000  
9,000  
11,000  
4,000  
6,000  
8,000  
10,000  
12,000  
13,000  
S*HF-C30  
S*HF-C40  
364 0.17 487 0.30 582 0.45 658 0.58 731 0.73 797 0.90 856 1.08  
435 0.36 522 0.51 614 0.67 694 0.88 765 1.11 830 1.34 886 1.54  
529 0.76 592 0.86 654 1.03 728 1.29 797 1.51 861 1.77 919 2.05  
623 1.32 687 1.56 735 1.67 778 1.79 836 2.13 896 2.45 953 2.72  
722 2.13 779 2.47 830 2.72 870 2.86 905 2.96 944 3.16 994 3.59  
824 3.23 874 3.64 922 4.02 965 4.30 1000 4.48 1032 4.59 1062 4.72  
288 0.22 393 0.38 477 0.55 547 0.74 611 0.94 668 1.16 721 1.39  
372 0.66 430 0.83 495 1.05 557 1.29 621 1.57 680 1.87 732 2.16  
472 1.55 522 1.82 563 2.04 606 2.29 653 2.59 698 2.91 742 3.24  
578 3.06 621 3.41 661 3.76 695 4.06 725 4.34 758 4.65 794 5.01  
688 5.36 725 5.80 760 6.24 793 6.66 823 7.06 850 7.42 875 7.76  
288 0.22 393 0.38 477 0.55 547 0.74 611 0.94 668 1.16 721 1.39  
372 0.66 430 0.83 495 1.05 557 1.29 621 1.57 680 1.87 732 2.16  
472 1.55 522 1.82 563 2.04 606 2.29 653 2.59 698 2.91 742 3.24  
578 3.06 621 3.41 661 3.76 695 4.06 725 4.34 758 4.65 794 5.01  
688 5.36 725 5.80 760 6.24 793 6.66 823 7.06 850 7.42 875 7.76  
271 0.29 364 0.54 438 0.82 499 1.07 550 1.30 601 1.56 651 1.87  
339 0.71 391 0.90 456 1.22 517 1.60 572 2.01 622 2.43 668 2.85  
425 1.55 460 1.73 497 1.96 542 2.30 591 2.72 639 3.20 684 3.73  
517 2.88 543 3.13 571 3.34 600 3.59 632 3.94 668 4.37 707 4.87  
612 4.84 633 5.15 655 5.43 678 5.68 702 5.95 726 6.29 752 6.91  
659 6.09 679 6.44 699 6.76 720 7.04 741 7.31  
S*HF-C50  
S*HF-C55  
S*HF-C60  
S*HF-C70  
S*HF-C75  
Note:  
Blocked areas identify non-standard motor selections.  
90 through 130 Ton 50% Modulating Exhaust Fan Performance  
CFM  
STD  
Negative Static Pressure  
0.500" W.G. 0.750" W.G. 1.000" W.G.  
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP  
0.250" W.G.  
1.250" W.G.  
1.500" W.G.  
AIR  
12,000  
14,000  
16,000  
18,000  
20,000  
452  
516  
583  
3.68  
5.71  
8.41  
495  
551  
609  
4.21  
6.21  
8.85  
536  
586  
643  
4.85  
6.85  
9.57  
576  
622  
5.46  
7.63  
614  
657  
6.17  
8.36  
651  
690  
6.95  
9.09  
672 10.29 704 11.18 735 12.07  
650 11.88 672 12.29 699 12.94 729 13.79 755 14.59 782 15.56  
718 16.20 737 16.62 758 17.18 785 18.03 811 18.97 835 19.86  
CFM  
STD  
Negative Static Pressure  
1.750" W.G.  
2.000" W.G.  
2.250" W.G.  
2.500" W.G.  
AIR  
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP  
12,000  
14,000  
16,000  
18,000  
20,000  
687  
723  
7.73  
9.96  
722  
8.55  
759  
9.46  
797 10.45  
754 10.88 785 11.79 815 12.72  
764 12.84 793 13.72 822 14.72 850 15.76  
811 16.62 838 17.53 864 18.41 889 19.39  
859 20.87 885 22.05 910 23.18 934 24.17  
Note:  
Blocked areas identify non-standard motor selections.  
79  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
2. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch  
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal  
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.  
Economizer Damper Adjustment  
Exhaust Air Dampers  
Verify that the exhaust dampers (if equipped) close tightly  
when the unit is off. Adjust the damper linkage as necessary  
to ensure proper closure. An access panel is provided un-  
der each damper assembly.  
3. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24  
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.  
4. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the unit  
control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to  
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition  
of the applicable SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV  
applications for the SERVICE TEST screens and  
programming instructions.  
Fresh Air & Return Air Damper Operation  
The fresh air and return air damper linkage is accessible  
from the filter section of the unit. The damper linkage con-  
necting the fresh air dampers to the return air dampers is  
preset from the factory in the number 1 position. Refer to  
Table 4-5 for the appropriate linkage position for the unit  
and operating airflow (CFM).  
5. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system  
components for operation by scrolling through the  
displays;  
WARNING  
Supply Fan (On)  
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)  
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if applicable)  
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)  
Fresh Air Dampers (Closed)  
No Step Surface!  
Do not walk on the sheet metal drain pan. Walking on  
the drain pan could cause the supporting metal to col-  
lapse. Failure of the drain pan could result in death or  
serious injury.  
6. Once the configuration for the components is complete,  
press the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test  
in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay  
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after  
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-  
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to  
confirm this choice.  
Note: Bridging between the unit's main supports  
may consist of multiple 2 by 12 boards or sheet  
metal grating.  
Arbitrarily adjusting the fresh air dampers to open fully  
when the return air dampers are closed or; failing to main-  
tain the return air pressure drop with the fresh air dampers  
when the return air dampers are closed, can overload the  
supply fan motor and cause building pressurization control  
problems due to improper CFM being delivered to the  
space.  
WARNING  
Rotating Components!  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
The fresh air/return air damper linkage is connected to a  
crank arm with a series of holes that allows the installer or  
operator to modify the amount of fresh air damper travel in  
order to match the return static pressure. Refer to  
Table 4-5 for the equivalent return air duct losses that corre-  
spond to each of the holes illustrated in Figure 4-5.  
7. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember  
that the delay designated in step 6 must elapse before  
the fan will begin to operate.  
To Adjust the Fresh Air Damper Travel:  
8. With the fresh air dampers fully closed and the supply fan  
operating at 100% airflow requirements, measure the  
return static pressure at the location determined in  
step 1.  
1. Drill a 1/4" hole through the unit casing up stream of the  
return air dampers. Use a location that will produce an  
accurate reading with the least amount of turbulence.  
Several locations may be necessary, and average the  
reading.  
9. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in  
the unit control panel to stop the fan operation.  
10. Open the field supplied main power disconnect switch  
upstream of the rooftop unit. Lock the disconnect switch  
in the "Open" position while working on the dampers.  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage!  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
11. Compare the static pressure reading to the static pres-  
sure ranges and linkage positions in Table 4-5 for the  
unit size and operating CFM.  
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK  
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.  
80  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
To relocate the fresh air/return air connecting rod to balance  
the fresh air damper pressure drop against the return static  
pressure, use the following steps. If no adjustment is neces-  
sary, proceed to step 17.  
15. Reattach the drive rod and swivel to the appropriate  
hole(s). The length of the drive rod may need to be  
adjusted to align with the new hole(s) location. If so,  
loosen the lock nut on the drive rod against the swivel.  
Turn the swivel "in" or "out" to shorten or lengthen the rod  
as necessary. For some holes, both ends of the rod may  
need to be adjusted.  
12. Remove the drive rod and swivel from the crank arm(s).  
If only one hole requires changing, loosen only that end.  
13. Manually open the return air dampers to the full open  
position.  
16. Tighten the lock nut against the swivel(s).  
17. Plug the holes after the proper CFM has been  
established.  
14. Manually close the fresh air dampers.  
Table 4-5  
F/A Damper Travel Adjustment  
Position of  
Damper  
Connecting Rod Crank Arm Hole  
(See Figure 4-5)  
Position #1  
Position #2  
Position #3  
Position #4  
Position #5  
Position #6  
Configuration  
2 - 3  
Use the tables below to select the appropriate  
crank arm hole configuration based on the;  
a. specific unit,  
b. operating CFM,  
c. and return static pressure.  
2 - 4  
2 - 5  
2 - 6  
1 - 8  
1 - 7  
Note:  
As shipped from the factory, the connect rod is  
installed in Position #1.  
Fresh Air Damper Pressure Drop (inches w.c. )  
50 - 55 Ton Units  
20 and 25 Ton Units  
Damper Position  
#3 #4  
0.03 0.04 0.06 0.13 0.16 0.33  
0.03 0.04 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.90  
0.19 0.21 0.32 0.52 0.75 1.75  
0.30 0.35 0.48 0.76 1.08 2.40  
Damper Position  
#3 #4  
10000 0.03 0.04 0.09 0.18 0.23 0.55  
14000 0.09 0.12 0.20 0.35 0.50 1.36  
18000 0.31 0.36 0.50 0.79 1.10  
20000 0.45 0.51 0.70 1.05 1.57  
22000 0.58 0.66 0.75 1.30 1.95  
24000 0.75 0.88 1.10 1.75 2.50  
CFM  
4000  
6000  
8000  
9000  
#1  
#2  
#5  
#6  
CFM  
#1  
#2  
#5  
#6  
-
-
-
-
10000 0.45 0.51 0.70 1.05 1.57  
11000 0.62 0.71 0.95 1.42 2.15  
-
-
30 Ton Units  
60 - 75 Ton Units  
Damper Position  
Damper Position  
CFM  
6000  
8000  
#1  
#2  
#3  
#4  
#5  
#6  
CFM  
#1  
#2  
#3  
#4  
#5  
#6  
0.03 0.04 0.07 0.15 0.20 0.43  
0.03 0.05 0.11 0.21 0.30 0.90  
14000 0.03 0.04 0.12 0.25 0.35 1.05  
18000 0.19 0.21 0.32 0.52 0.75 1.75  
10000 0.15 0.19 0.26 0.43 0.62 1.50  
11000 0.20 0.25 0.37 0.60 0.85 1.85  
12000 0.31 0.36 0.50 0.79 1.10 2.40  
22000 0.45 0.51 0.70 1.05 1.57  
26000 0.70 0.80 1.02 1.58 2.30  
-
-
-
-
28000 0.88 1.03 1.30 2.20  
30000 1.05 1.22 1.55 2.65  
-
-
13000 0.42 0.48 0.62 0.97 1.42  
-
40 Ton Units  
90 - 130 Ton Units  
Damper Position  
Damper Position  
CFM  
#1  
#2  
#3  
#4  
#5  
#6  
CFM  
#1  
#2  
#3  
#4  
#5  
#6  
8000  
0.03 0.04 0.08 0.16 0.21 0.52  
27000 0.31 0.36 0.50 0.79 1.10 2.40  
10000 0.03 0.05 0.11 0.21 0.30 0.90  
12000 0.10 0.13 0.21 0.38 0.55 1.40  
14000 0.20 0.25 0.37 0.60 0.85 1.85  
32000 0.55 0.64 0.72 1.25 1.88  
36000 0.75 0.88 1.10 1.75 2.50  
-
-
-
-
-
40000 1.00 1.18 1.50 2.50  
-
-
-
16000 0.41 0.46 0.60 0.94 1.38  
18000 0.56 0.65 0.74 1.28 1.92  
-
-
43000 1.20 1.42 1.92  
46000 1.40 1.58 2.29  
-
-
81  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
Figure 4-5  
Fresh Air & Return Air Linkage Adjustment  
4. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24  
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.  
5. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the  
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to  
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition  
of the RT-SVP01A-EN for CV applications or  
Top View  
RETURN AIR  
DAMPERS  
FRESH AIR  
DAMPERS  
RT-SVP02A-EN for VAV applications for the SERVICE  
TEST screens and programming instructions.  
6. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-  
nents for operation by scrolling through the displays;  
3
4
20 to 30 Ton  
Compressor 1A (On)  
Compressor 1B (Off)  
Condenser Fans  
1
8
5
2
40 through 60 Ton  
Compressor 1A (On)  
Compressor 1B (Off)  
Compressor 2A (Off)  
Compressor 2B (Off)  
Condenser Fans  
6
FILTER  
7
SECTION  
70 & 105 Ton  
Compressor 1A & 1B (On)  
Compressor 1C (Off)  
Compressor 2A & 2B (Off)  
Compressor 2C (Off)  
Condenser Fans  
115 & 130 Ton  
Compressor 1A & 1B (On)  
Compressor 1C & 1D (Off)  
Compressor 2A & 2B (Off)  
Compressor 2C & 2D (Off)  
Condenser Fans  
7. Attach a set of service gauges onto the suction and dis-  
charge gauge ports for each circuit. Refer to Figure 4-6  
for the various compressor locations.  
Compressor Start-Up  
(All Systems)  
1. Ensure that the "System" selection switch at the remote  
panel is in the "Off" position.  
8. Once the configuration for the components is complete,  
press the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test  
in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay  
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after  
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-  
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to  
confirm this choice.  
2. Before closing the disconnect switch, ensure that the  
compressor discharge service valve and the liquid line  
service valve for each circuit is back seated.  
CAUTION  
Compressor Damage!  
WARNING  
Rotating Components!  
Do not allow liquid refrigerant to enter the suction line.  
Excessive liquid accumulation in the liquid lines may  
result in compressor damage.  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
COMPRESSOR SERVICE VALVES MUST BE FULLY  
OPENED BEFORE START-UP (SUCTION, DISCHARGE,  
LIQUID LINE, AND OIL LINE).  
9. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember  
that the delay designated in step 8 must elapse before  
the system will begin to operate.  
3. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch  
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal block  
1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14 to allow  
the crankcase heater to operate a minimum of 8 hours be-  
fore continuing.  
10. Once each compressor or compressor pair has started,  
verify that the rotation is correct. If a scroll compressor is  
rotating backwards, it will not pump and a loud rattling  
sound can be observed. Check the electrical phasing at  
the load side of the compressor contactor. If the phasing  
is correct, before condemning the compressor, inter-  
Note: Compressor Damage could occur if the  
crankcase heater is not allowed to operate the  
minimum of 8 hours before starting the  
compressor(s).  
82  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
change any two leads to check the internal motor phas-  
ing. If the compressor runs backward for an extended  
period (15 to 30 minutes), the motor winding can over  
heat and cause the motor winding thermostats to open.  
This will cause a “compressor trip” diagnostic and stop  
the compressor.  
Note: Do Not release refrigerant to the atmosphere!  
If adding or removing refrigerant is required, the  
service technician must comply with all Federal,  
State and local laws. Refer to general service  
bulletin MSCU-SB-1 (latest edition).  
7. Verify that the oil level in each compressor is correct. The  
oil level may be down to the bottom of the sightglass but  
should never be above the sightglass.  
11. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in  
the unit control panel to stop the compressor operation.  
12. Repeat steps 5 through 11 for each compressor stage  
and the appropriate condenser fans.  
8. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in  
the unit control panel to stop the system operation.  
Refrigerant Charging  
9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 for the number 2 refrigeration  
circuit.  
1. Attach a set of service gauges onto the suction and dis-  
charge gauge ports for each circuit. Refer to Figure 4-6  
for the various compressor locations.  
10. After shutting the system off, check the compressor's  
oil’s appearance. Discoloration of the oil indicates that an  
abnormal condition has occurred. If the oil is dark and  
smells burnt, it has overheated because of: compressor  
is operating at extremely high condensing temperatures;  
high superheat; a compressor mechanical failure; or, oc-  
currence of a motor burnout.  
2. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the  
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to  
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition  
of the SAHF-PTG-1B for CV applications or SAHF-PTG-  
2B for VAV applications for the SERVICE TEST screens  
and programming instructions.  
If the oil is black and contains metal flakes, a mechanical  
failure has occurred. This symptom is often accompanied  
by a high compressor amperage draw.  
3. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-  
nents for the number 1 refrigeration circuit by scrolling  
through the displays;  
If a motor burnout is suspected, use an acid test kit to  
check the condition of the oil. Test results will indicate an  
acid level exceeding 0.05 mg KOH/g if a burnout oc-  
curred.  
Supply Fan (On)  
Inlet Guide Vanes/VFD (100%, if applicable)  
OCC/UNOCC Relay (Unoccupied for VAV units)  
All Compressors for each circuit (On)  
Condenser Fans for each circuit (On)  
The scroll compressor uses Trane OIL-42 without substi-  
tution. The appropriate oil charge for a 9 and 10 Ton  
scroll compressor is 8.5 pints. For a 14 and 15 Ton scroll  
compressor, use 13.8 pints.  
4. Once the configuration for the components is complete,  
press the NEXT key until the LCD displays the “Start test  
in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to designate the delay  
before the test is to start. This service test will begin after  
the TEST START key is pressed and the delay desig-  
nated in this step has elapsed. Press the ENTER key to  
confirm this choice.  
Compressor Crankcase Heaters  
9 and 10 ton scroll compressors have a 100-watt heater in-  
stalled. 14 and 15 ton scroll compressors have two 80-watt  
heaters installed per compressor.  
Compressor Operational Sounds  
WARNING  
Because of the scroll compressor design, it emits a higher  
frequency tone (sound) than a reciprocating compressor. It  
is designed to accommodate liquids, both oil and refriger-  
ant, without causing compressor damage. The following dis-  
cussion describes some of the operational sounds that dif-  
ferentiate it from those typically associated with a recipro-  
cating compressor. These sounds do not affect the opera-  
tion or reliability of the compressor.  
Rotating Components!  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
5. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember  
that the delay designated in step 4 must elapse before  
the system will begin to operate.  
At Shutdown  
When a Scroll compressor shuts down, the gas within the  
scroll expands and causes momentary reverse rotation until  
the discharge check valve closes. This results in a “flutter”  
type sound.  
6. After all of the compressors and condenser fans for the  
number 1 circuit have been operating for approximately  
30 minutes, observe the operating pressures. Use the  
appropriate pressure curve in Tables 4-6 to determine  
the proper operating pressures. For superheat and sub-  
cooling guidelines, refer to "Thermostatic Expansion  
Valves and Charging by Subcooling" at the end of this  
section.  
At Low Ambient Start-Up  
When the compressor starts up under low ambient condi-  
tions, the initial flow rate of the compressor is low due to the  
low condensing pressure. This causes a low differential  
across the thermal expansion valve that limits its capacity.  
Under these conditions, it is not unusual to hear the com-  
pressor rattle until the suction pressure climbs and the flow  
rate increases.  
83  
Figure 4-6  
Compressor Locations  
84  
Table 4-6  
20 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans "On")  
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE  
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
FULL LOAD  
360  
340  
105 F OD Ambient  
320  
300  
280  
260  
240  
220  
200  
180  
160  
95 F OD Ambient  
85 F OD Ambient  
75 F OD Ambient  
65 F OD Ambient  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG  
To Check Operating Pressures  
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the  
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.  
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)  
entering the condenser coil.  
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)  
next to the compressor.  
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.  
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the  
discharge pressure. The measured discharge  
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.  
25 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans "On")  
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE  
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
FULL LOAD  
380  
360  
340  
320  
300  
280  
260  
240  
220  
200  
180  
105 F OD Ambient  
95 F OD Ambient  
85 F OD Ambient  
75 F OD Ambient  
65 F OD Ambient  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG  
To Check Operating Pressures  
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the  
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.  
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)  
entering the condenser coil.  
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)  
next to the compressor.  
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.  
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the  
discharge pressure. The measured discharge  
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.  
85  
Table 4-6 (Continued)  
30 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans "On")  
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE  
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
FULL LOAD  
380  
360  
105 F OD Ambient  
340  
95 F OD Ambient  
85 F OD Ambient  
320  
300  
280  
260  
240  
220  
200  
180  
75 F OD Ambient  
65 F OD Ambient  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG  
To Check Operating Pressures  
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the  
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.  
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)  
entering the condenser coil.  
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)  
next to the compressor.  
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.  
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the  
discharge pressure. The measured discharge  
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.  
40 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE  
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
FULL LOAD  
380  
360  
105 F OD Ambient  
340  
320  
95 F OD Ambient  
300  
280  
85 F OD Ambient  
260  
75 F OD Ambient  
240  
220  
200  
180  
65 F OD Ambient  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG  
To Check Operating Pressures  
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the  
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.  
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)  
entering the condenser coil.  
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)  
next to the compressor.  
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.  
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the  
discharge pressure. The measured discharge  
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.  
86  
Table 4-6 (Continued)  
50 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt; "On")  
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE  
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
FULL LOAD  
380  
360  
105 F OD Ambient  
95 F OD Ambient  
85 F OD Ambient  
340  
320  
300  
280  
260  
240  
220  
200  
180  
75 F OD Ambient  
65 F OD Ambient  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG  
To Check Operating Pressures  
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the  
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.  
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)  
entering the condenser coil.  
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)  
next to the compressor.  
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.  
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the  
discharge pressure. The measured discharge  
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.  
55 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
55 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
Cooling Cycle Pressure Curve  
(Based on Indoor Airfow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
Full Load  
360  
105 F OD Ambient  
340  
320  
95 F OD Ambient  
300  
85 F OD Ambient  
280  
260  
240  
220  
200  
180  
75 F OD Ambient  
65 F OD Ambient  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
Suction Pressure, PSIG  
87  
Table 4-6 (Continued)  
55 Ton Hi Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
55 Ton Hi Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
Cooling Cycle Pressure Curve  
(Based on Indoor Airfow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
Full Load  
360  
105 F OD Ambient  
340  
320  
95 F OD Ambient  
300  
85 F OD Ambient  
280  
260  
75 F OD Ambient  
240  
65 F OD Ambient  
220  
200  
180  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
Suction Pressure, PSIG  
60 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt; "On")  
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE  
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
FULL LOAD  
380  
360  
105 F OD Ambient  
340  
320  
95 F OD Ambient  
300  
280  
260  
240  
220  
200  
180  
85 F OD Ambient  
75 F OD Ambient  
65 F OD Ambient  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG  
To Check Operating Pressures  
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the  
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.  
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)  
entering the condenser coil.  
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)  
next to the compressor.  
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.  
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the  
discharge pressure. The measured discharge  
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.  
88  
Table 4-6 (Continued)  
60 Ton Hi Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt; "On")  
60 Ton Hi Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
Cooling Cycle Pressure Curve  
(Based on Indoor Airfow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
Full Load  
105 F OD Ambient  
320  
300  
95 F OD Ambient  
280  
85 F OD Ambient  
260  
240  
75 F OD Ambient  
220  
65 F OD Ambient  
200  
180  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
Suction Pressure, PSIG  
70 Ton Standard Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
70 Ton Standard Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
Cooling Cycle Pressure Curve  
(Based on Indoor Airfow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
Full Load  
360  
105 F OD Ambient  
340  
320  
95 F OD Ambient  
300  
280  
85 F OD Ambient  
260  
75 F OD Ambient  
240  
220  
65 F OD Ambient  
200  
180  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
Suction Pressure, PSIG  
89  
Table 4-6 (Continued)  
75 Ton Standard Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
75 Ton Std Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
Cooling Cycle Pressure Curve  
(Based on Indoor Airfow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
Full Load  
380  
360  
105 F OD Ambient  
95 F OD Ambient  
340  
320  
300  
280  
260  
240  
220  
200  
180  
85 F OD Ambient  
75 F OD Ambient  
65 F OD Ambient  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
Suction Pressure, PSIG  
75 Ton Hi-Cap Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
75 Ton Hi-Cap Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
Cooling Cycle Pressure Curve  
(Based on Indoor Airfow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
Full Load  
380  
360  
105 F OD Ambient  
340  
320  
95 F OD Ambient  
300  
85 F OD Ambient  
280  
260  
75 F OD Ambient  
240  
65 F OD Ambient  
220  
200  
180  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
Suction Pressure, PSIG  
90  
Table 4-6 (Continued)  
90 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt; "On")  
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE  
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
FULL LOAD  
380  
360  
105 F OD Ambient  
95 F OD Ambient  
340  
320  
300  
280  
260  
240  
220  
200  
180  
85 F OD Ambient  
75 F OD Ambient  
65 F OD Ambient  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG  
To Check Operating Pressures  
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the  
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.  
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)  
entering the condenser coil.  
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)  
next to the compressor.  
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.  
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the  
discharge pressure. The measured discharge  
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.  
105 Ton Standard & Hi-Cap Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt, "On")  
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE  
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
FULL LOAD  
380  
360  
340  
105 F OD Ambient  
320  
95 F OD Ambient  
85 F OD Ambient  
300  
280  
260  
240  
220  
200  
180  
75 F OD Ambient  
65 F OD Ambient  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG  
To Check Operating Pressures  
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the  
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.  
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)  
entering the condenser coil.  
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)  
next to the compressor.  
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.  
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the  
discharge pressure. The measured discharge  
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.  
91  
Table 4-6 (Continued)  
115 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt; "On")  
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE  
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
FULL LOAD  
380  
360  
105 F OD Ambient  
340  
320  
95 F OD Ambient  
300  
85 F OD Ambient  
280  
260  
240  
220  
200  
180  
75 F OD Ambient  
65 F OD Ambient  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG  
To Check Operating Pressures  
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the  
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.  
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)  
entering the condenser coil.  
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)  
next to the compressor.  
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.  
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the  
discharge pressure. The measured discharge  
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.  
130 Ton Operating Pressure Curve (All Compressors and Condenser Fans, per ckt;  
COOLING CYCLE PRESSURE CURVE  
(Based on Indoor Airflow of 400 CFM / Ton)  
FULL LOAD  
380  
105 F OD Ambient  
360  
340  
95 F OD Ambient  
320  
85 F OD Ambient  
300  
280  
260  
240  
220  
200  
180  
75 F OD Ambient  
65 F OD Ambient  
50  
55  
60  
65  
70  
75  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
SUCTION PRESSURE, PSIG  
To Check Operating Pressures  
4. Plot the outdoor dry bulb temperature and the  
1. Start the unit and allow the pressures to stabilize.  
2. Measure the outdoor air dry bulb temperature (F)  
entering the condenser coil.  
3. Measure the discharge and suction pressure (psig)  
next to the compressor.  
operating suction pressure (psig) onto the chart.  
5. At the point of intersection, read to the left for the  
discharge pressure. The measured discharge  
pressure should be within ± 7 psig of the graph.  
92  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
Thermostatic Expansion Valves  
With the unit operating at "Full Circuit Capacity", acceptable  
subcooling ranges between 14 F to 22 F.  
The reliability and performance of the refrigeration system  
is heavily dependent upon proper expansion valve adjust-  
ment. Therefore, the importance of maintaining the proper  
superheat cannot be over emphasized. Accurate measure-  
ments of superheat will provide the following information.  
Measuring Subcooling  
1. At the liquid line service valve, measure the liquid line  
pressure. Using a Refrigerant 22 pressure/temperature  
chart, convert the pressure reading into the correspond-  
ing saturated temperature.  
1. How well the expansion valve is controlling the refriger-  
ant flow.  
2. Measure the actual liquid line temperature as close to the  
liquid line service valve as possible. To ensure an accu-  
rate reading, clean the line thoroughly where the tem-  
perature sensor will be attached. After securing the sen-  
sor to the line, insulate the sensor and line to isolate it  
from the ambient air.  
2. The efficiency of the evaporator coil.  
3. The amount of protection the compressor is receiving  
against flooding or overheating.The recommended range  
for superheat is 10 to 16 degrees at the evaporator. Sys-  
tems operating with less than 10 degrees of superheat:  
Note: Glass thermometers do not have sufficient  
contact area to give an accurate reading.  
a. Could cause serious compressor damage due to  
refrigerant floodback.  
3. Determine the system subcooling by subtracting the ac-  
tual liquid line temperature (measured in step 2) from  
the saturated liquid temperature (converted in step 1).  
b. Removes working surface from the evaporator  
normally used for heat transfer.  
Low Ambient Dampers  
Systems operating with superheat in excess of 16 degrees:  
Operation  
a. Could cause excessive compressor cycling on  
internal winding thermostat which leads to  
compressor motor failure.  
Low Ambient Dampers are available as a factory installed  
option on 20 - 75 Ton units or can be field-installed. Damp-  
ers are used to extend the operation of these units from the  
standard operational temperatures to a minimum of 0F  
without hot gas bypass or 10F with hot gas bypass. (These  
values apply when wind speed across the condenser coil is  
less than 5 m.p.h. If typical wind speeds are higher than 5  
m.p.h., a wind screen around the unit may be required.) By  
restricting the airflow across the condenser coils, saturated  
condensing temperatures can be maintained as the ambient  
temperatures change.  
b. Lowers the efficiency of the evaporator by reducing  
the heat transfer capability.  
Tables are based on outdoor ambient between 65 & 105 F,  
relative humidity above 40 percent. Measuring the operat-  
ing pressures can be meaningless outside of these ranges.  
Measuring Superheat  
1. Measure the suction pressure at the suction line gauge  
The low ambient modulating output(s) on the compressor  
module controls the low ambient damper actuator for each  
refrigerant circuit in response to saturated condensing tem-  
perature.  
access port located near the compressor.  
2. Using a Refrigerant/Temperature chart, convert the pres-  
sure reading to a corresponding saturated vapor tem-  
perature.  
When the control has staged up to it's highest stage (stage  
2 or 3 depending on unit size), the modulating output will be  
at 100% (10 VDC). When the control is at stage 1, the  
modulating output (0 to 10 VDC) will control the saturated  
condensing temperature to within the programmable "con-  
densing temperature low ambient control point".  
3. Measured the suction line temperature as close to the  
expansion valve bulb, as possible.  
4. Subtract the saturated vapor temperature obtained in  
step 2 from the actual suction line temperature obtained  
in step 3. The difference between the two temperatures  
is known as "superheat".  
The following Table gives the minimum starting tempera-  
tures for both "Standard" & "Low" Ambient units. Do not  
start the unit in the cooling mode if the ambient temperature  
is below the recommended operating temperatures.  
When adjusting superheat, recheck the system subcooling  
before shutting the system "Off".  
Minimum Starting Ambient (1)  
Charging by Subcooling  
Standard (2)  
Low Ambient  
without  
with  
HGBP  
10°  
The outdoor ambient temperature must be between 65 and  
105 F and the relative humidity of the air entering the  
evaporator must be above 40 percent. When the tempera-  
tures are outside of these ranges, measuring the operating  
pressures can be meaningless.  
Unit Size  
20 & 40  
25 & 30  
70 - 130  
55  
HGBP  
0°  
55°  
50°  
45°  
40°  
35°  
30°  
10°  
0°  
10°  
0°  
10°  
0°  
Do not attempt to charge the system with the low ambient  
dampers and/or hot gas bypass operating (if applicable).  
Disable the low ambient dampers in the "Open" position (re-  
fer to the "Low Ambient Damper" section) and de-energize  
the hot gas bypass valves before taking performance mea-  
surements.  
50  
10°  
0°  
60  
10°  
0°  
Notes:  
1. Min. starting ambients in degrees F and is based on unit operating  
at min. step of unloading & unloading & 5 mph wind across condenser.  
2. With or Without HGBP  
93  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
Damper Installation  
5. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-  
nents for operation by scrolling through the Human Inter-  
face displays;  
When a unit is ordered with the low ambient option (i.e.,  
Digit 19 is a “1” in the model number), a damper is factory  
installed over the condenser fans 2B1, 2B4, 2B13 & 2B14  
(depending on unit size). Refer to the illustration in  
Figure 4-1 for the damper locations.  
Electric Heat  
Supply Fan (On)  
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)  
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if  
applicable)  
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)  
Heat Stages 1 & 2 (On)  
For field installation, mount the dampers over the con-  
denser fans at the locations shown in Figure 4-1 and con-  
nect the actuator for each circuit. (Refer to the Installation  
Instructions provided with each kit.)  
Damper Adjustment (Factory or Field Installed)  
The UCM has a factory default setpoint of 90F. This set-  
point can be adjusted using the Human Interface program-  
ming procedures.  
Steam or Hot Water Heat  
Supply Fan (On)  
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)  
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if  
applicable)  
Inspect the damper blades for proper alignment and opera-  
tion. Dampers should be in the closed position during the  
"Off" cycle. If adjustment is required;  
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)  
Hydronic Heat Actuator (100% Open)  
Open the main steam or hot water valve supplying  
the rooftop heater coils.  
1. At the Human Interface, program the actuator for 0% on  
circuit #1 and/or circuit #2. (The output signal will go to  
0.0 VDC.)  
6. Once the configuration for the appropriate heating sys-  
tem is complete, press the NEXT key until the LCD dis-  
plays the “Start test in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to  
designate the delay before the test is to start. This ser-  
vice test will begin after the TEST START key is pressed  
and the delay designated in this step has elapsed. Press  
the ENTER key to confirm this choice.  
2. Loosen the damper shaft "Locking" set screws on the ac-  
tuator  
3. Firmly hold the damper blades in the closed position  
4. Retighten the "Locking" set screws.  
WARNING  
Rotating Components!  
To check damper operation, program the actuator for 100%  
on circuit #1 and/or circuit #2. (The output signal will go to  
10 VDC and the damper will drive to the full open position.  
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-  
ing of this product it may be necessary to measure the  
speed of rotating components. Have a qualified or li-  
censed service individual who has been properly  
trained in handling exposed rotating components, per-  
form these tasks. Failure to follow all safety precau-  
tions when exposed to rotating components could re-  
sult in death or serious injury.  
Electric, Steam and Hot Water Start-Up  
(Constant Volume & Variable Air Volume Systems)  
1. Ensure that the "System" selection switch at the remote  
panel is in the "Off" position.  
2. Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch  
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal  
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.  
7. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember  
that the delay designated in step 6 must elapse before  
the fan will begin to operate.  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage!  
8. Once the system has started, verify that the electric heat  
or the hydronic heat system is operating properly by us-  
ing appropriate service technics; i.e. amperage readings,  
delta tees, etc..  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
9. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in  
the unit control panel to stop the system operation.  
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK  
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.  
Gas Furnace Start-Up  
(Constant Volume & Variable Air Volume Systems)  
3. Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 and the 24  
volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On" position.  
It is important to establish and maintain the appropriate air/  
fuel mixture to assure that the gas furnace operates safely  
and efficiently.  
4. Open the Human Interface access door, located in the  
unit control panel, and press the SERVICE MODE key to  
display the first service screen. Refer to the latest edition  
of the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or VAV ap-  
plications for the SERVICE TEST screens and program-  
ming instructions.  
Since the proper manifold gas pressure for a particular in-  
stallation will vary due to the specific BTU content of the lo-  
cal gas supply, adjust the burner based on carbon dioxide  
and oxygen levels.  
94  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
The volume of air supplied by the combustion blower deter-  
mines the amount of oxygen available for combustion, while  
the manifold gas pressure establishes fuel input. By mea-  
suring the percentage of carbon dioxide produced as a by-  
product of combustion, the operator can estimate the  
amount of oxygen used and modify the air volume or the  
gas pressure to obtain the proper air/fuel ratio.  
the heat exchanger. In appearance, a normal flame has  
a clearly defined shape, and is primarily (75%) blue in  
color with an orange tip.  
5. Check the manifold gas pressure by using the manifold  
pressure port on the gas valve. Refer to Table 4-7 for the  
required manifold pressure for high-fire operation. If it  
needs adjusting, remove the cap covering the high-fire  
adjustment screw on the gas valve. Refer to Figure 4-8  
for the adjustment screw location. Turn the screw clock-  
wise to increase the gas pressure or counterclockwise to  
decrease the gas pressure.  
Arriving at the correct air/fuel mixture for a furnace results in  
rated burner output, limited production of carbon monoxide,  
and a steady flame that minimizes nuisance shutdowns.  
6. Use a carbon dioxide analyzer and measure the percent-  
age of carbon dioxide in the flue gas. Refer to the illus-  
tration in Figure 4-7. Take several samples to assure that  
an accurate reading is obtained. Refer to Table 4-7 for  
the proper carbon dioxide levels. A carbon dioxide level  
exceeding the listed range indicates incomplete combus-  
tion due to inadequate air or excessive gas.  
WARNING  
Hazardous Gases and Flammable Vapors!  
Exposure to hazardous gases from fuel substances  
have been shown to cause cancer, birth defects or  
other reproductive harm. Improper installation, adjust-  
ment, alteration, service or use of this product could  
cause flammable mixtures. To avoid hazardous gases  
and flammable vapors follow proper installation and set  
up of this product and all warnings as provided in this  
manual. Failure to follow all instructions could result in  
death or serious injury.  
When using dry nitrogen cylinders for pressurizing  
units for leak testing, always provide a pressure regula-  
tor on the cylinder to prevent excessively high unit  
pressures. Never pressurize unit above the maximum  
recommended unit test pressure as specified in appli-  
cable unit literature. Failure to properly regulate pres-  
sure could result in a violent explosion, which could re-  
sult in death or serious injury or equipment or prop-  
erty-only-damage.  
Combustion Air Adjustment (O2 )  
7. Use an oxygen analyzer and measure the percentage of  
oxygen in the flue gas. Take several samples to assure  
an accurate reading. Compare the measured oxygen  
level to the combustion curve in Table 4-8. The oxygen  
content of the flue gas should be 4% to 5%. If the oxygen  
level is outside this range, adjust the combustion air  
damper to increase or decrease the amount of air enter-  
ing the combustion chamber. Refer to Figure 4-10 for the  
location of the combustion air damper .  
8. Recheck the oxygen and carbon dioxide levels after each  
adjustment. After completing the high-fire checkout and  
adjustment procedure, the low-fire setting may require  
adjusting.  
Two Stage Gas Furnace  
Low-Fire Adjustment  
(500 MBH, 850 & 1,000 MBH only)  
1. Use the TEST initiation procedures outlined in the previ-  
ous section to operate the furnace in the low-fire state  
(1st Stage).  
High-Fire Adjustment  
1. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-  
nents for operation by scrolling through the Human Inter-  
face displays;  
2. Use a carbon dioxide analyzer and measure the percent-  
age of carbon dioxide in the flue gas. Refer to the illus-  
tration in Figure 4-7, Inset A. Take several samples to as-  
sure that an accurate reading is obtained. Refer to  
Table 4-8 for the proper carbon dioxide levels. If the  
measured carbon dioxide level is within the listed values,  
no adjustment is necessary. A carbon dioxide level ex-  
ceeding the listed range indicates incomplete combus-  
tion due to inadequate air or excessive gas.  
Gas Heat  
Supply Fan (On)  
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)  
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if  
applicable)  
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)  
Heat Stages 1 & 2 (On)  
Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 4S24  
located in the heater control panel to the "On"  
position.  
3. Check the manifold gas pressure by using the manifold  
pressure port on the gas valve. Refer to Table 4-8 for the  
required manifold pressure during low-fire operation. If it  
needs adjusting, remove the cap covering the low-fire  
adjustment screw on the gas valve. Refer to Figure 4-8  
for the adjustment screw location. Turn the screw clock-  
wise to increase the gas pressure or counterclockwise to  
decrease the gas pressure.  
Open the manual gas valve, located in the gas  
heat section.  
2. Once the configuration for the appropriate heating sys-  
tem is complete, press the NEXT key until the LCD dis-  
plays the “Start test in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to  
designate the delay before the test is to start. This ser-  
vice test will begin after the TEST START key is pressed  
and the delay designated in this step has elapsed. Press  
the ENTER key to confirm this choice.  
Note: Do not adjust the combustion air damper  
while the furnace is operating at low-fire.  
3. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember  
that the delay designated in step 2 must elapse before  
the system will begin to operate.  
4. Check the carbon dioxide levels after each adjustment.  
5. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in  
the unit control panel to stop the system operation.  
4. Once the system has started, check the appearance of  
the flame through the sight glass provided on the front of  
95  
Table 4-7  
Figure 4-7  
Recommended Manifold Pressures and CO2 Levels  
during Furnace Operation (See Notes)  
Flue Gas Carbon Dioxide & Oxygen Measurements  
Furnace  
Stage  
MBH  
Firing  
Rate  
100%  
50%  
100%  
50%  
100%  
50%  
100%  
59%  
Manifold  
%CO2  
Pressure  
3.0-3.5  
0.9  
High-Fire  
Low-Fire  
High-Fire  
Low-Fire  
High-Fire  
Low-Fire  
High-Fire  
Low-Fire  
High-Fire  
Low-Fire  
235  
117  
350  
175  
500  
250  
850  
500  
1000  
500  
8.5-9.5  
6.0-7.0  
8.5-9.5  
6.0-7.0  
8.5-9.5  
6.0-7.0  
8.5-9.5  
6.0-7.0  
8.5-9.5  
6.0-7.0  
3.0-3.5  
0.9  
3.0-3.5  
1.25  
3.0-3.5  
1.25  
100%  
50%  
3.0-3.5  
1.25  
Manifold pressures are given in inches w.c.  
High fire manifold pressure is adjustable on all heaters.  
Low fire manifold pressure is non-adjustable on 235 MBH  
and 350 MBH heaters.  
Table 4-8  
Natural Gas Combustion Curve  
(Ratio of Oxygen to Carbon Dioxide in percent)  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
Curve  
A
Fuel  
=
1,000 BTU per cu. ft.  
of Natural Gas.  
A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21  
Percent Oxygen  
Figure 4-8  
Gas Valve Adjustment Screw Locations  
96  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
Full Modulating Gas Furnace  
WARNING  
Rotating Components!  
Full Modulating gas heaters are available for the 500, 850  
and 1000 MBH heater sizes. These heaters are available in  
the same cabinet sizes as the current heaters.  
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshoot-  
ing of this product it may be necessary to measure the  
speed of rotating components. Have a qualified or li-  
censed service individual who has been properly  
trained in handling exposed rotating components, per-  
form these tasks. Failure to follow all safety precau-  
tions when exposed to rotating components could re-  
sult in death or serious injury.  
The firing rate of the unit can vary from the pilot rate of 125  
MBH up to the nameplate rating of the unit. The turn down  
ratios, therefore, vary from 4:1 for the 500 MBH to 8:1 for  
the 1000 MBH heater.  
Heat Exchanger  
The heat exchanger drum, tubes and front and rear head-  
ers are constructed from AL-6XN or 25-6MO, two of the  
most corrosion resistant stainless steel alloys available.  
4. Once the system has started, check the appearance of  
the flame through the sight glass provided on the front of  
the heat exchanger. In appearance, a normal flame has  
a clearly defined shape, and is primarily (75%) blue in  
color with an orange tip.  
Unit control  
The unit is controlled by a supply air temperature sensor lo-  
cated in the supply air stream for VAV units. CV units have  
two sensors, one located in the supply air stream and the  
zone sensor. The temperature sensor signal is sent to the  
5. Check the inlet gas pressure at the modulating gas valve.  
The inlet pressure should be 6" to 8" w.c..  
Heat module of the Intellipak® Unit Control. The control sig-  
nal from the Heat Module is an inverse proportional 5 -10V  
DC. The higher the voltage signal, the lower the call for  
heat.  
6. Use a carbon dioxide analyzer and measure the percent-  
age of carbon dioxide in the flue gas. Refer to the illus-  
tration in Figure 4-7. Take several samples to assure that  
an accurate reading is obtained. If the measured carbon  
dioxide level is between 8.0% and 9.5%, no adjustment  
is necessary. If the CO2 is outside this range, it indicates  
incomplete combustion due to inadequate air or exces-  
sive gas.  
The 5 -10V DC. signal controls the angular position of the  
combustion air damper through a direct coupled damper ac-  
tuator motor. The position of the air damper in turn controls  
the combustion air pressure that is sensed by the modulat-  
ing gas valve. The greater the combustion air pressure, the  
greater the call for gas and the higher the firing rate of the  
heater. As the temperature setpoint is reached, the Modu-  
lating Heat control will cause the combustion air actuator to  
change the damper position to a lower firing rate that  
matches the heat load of the space.  
The pressure ratio and bias adjustment screws are lo-  
cated on top of the regulator under a sealed plate. The  
actual settings can be seen through windows on each  
side of the regulator. Refer to the illustration in  
Figure 4-9.  
1. Use Table 4-1 to program the following system compo-  
nents for operation by scrolling through the Human Inter-  
face displays;  
Note: The burner capacity is controlled by the  
movement of the air damper. This has been preset  
at the factory and normally does not need field  
adjustment. The combustion quality (air/gas) is  
controlled by the settings on the regulator (the plus  
(+) and minus (-) indications relate to the change in  
gas flow.  
Gas Heat  
Supply Fan (On)  
Inlet Guide Vanes (100% Open, if applicable)  
Variable Frequency Drive (100% Output, if  
applicable)  
RTM Occ/Unocc Output (Unoccupied)  
High Fire (90%)  
Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 4S24  
located in the heater control panel to the "On"  
position.  
7. Set the air/gas ratio to the desired value using the #1 ad-  
justment screw until the optimum values between (8.0  
and 9.5%) are obtained (course setting).  
8. Use Table 4-1 to program the minimum (5%) firing rate.  
Allow the system to operate for approximately 10 min-  
utes.  
Open the manual gas valve, located in the gas  
heat section.  
2. Once the configuration for the appropriate heating sys-  
tem is complete, press the NEXT key until the LCD dis-  
plays the “Start test in __Sec.” screen. Press the + key to  
designate the delay before the test is to start. This ser-  
vice test will begin after the TEST START key is pressed  
and the delay designated in this step has elapsed. Press  
the ENTER key to confirm this choice.  
9. Use a carbon dioxide analyzer and measure the percent-  
age of carbon dioxide in the flue gas. If the measured  
carbon dioxide level is between 6.0% and 8.0%, no ad-  
justment is necessary. If an adjustment is needed, turn  
the #2 adjustment screw on the regulator in the Plus (+)  
direction to increase the CO2 and in the Minus (-) direc-  
tion to decrease the CO2. Refer to the illustration in Fig-  
ure 4-9 for the adjustment screw location.  
3. Press the TEST START key to start the test. Remember  
that the delay designated in step 2 must elapse before  
the system will begin to operate.  
Note: It is normal for the low fire CO2 to be lower  
than the high fire.  
97  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
2. Follow the checkout procedures discussed in the previ-  
ous steps.  
10. If the measured carbon dioxide level is below the rec-  
ommended values for low heat, return the burner to 90%  
fire rate and repeat steps 6 and 7, to achieve optimum  
combustion.  
Note: The minimum firing rate for a limited  
modulating gas furnace in step 8 is 33%. Travel of  
the combustion air damper is limited by a welded  
stop.  
11. Program the burner for 100% operation and recheck the  
CO2 or O2 value.  
12. Check the flue gas values at several intermediate out-  
put levels. If corrections are necessary;  
3. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in  
the unit control panel to stop the system operation.  
- Adjust the pressure ratio screw 1 at high fire operation  
only.  
Figure 4-9  
Modulating Gas Regulator  
- Adjust the bias screw 2 at low fire operation only.  
13. Press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module in  
the unit control panel to stop the system operation.  
Limited Modulating Gas Furnace  
Limited Modulating gas heaters are available for the 500,  
850 and 1000 MBH heater sizes. These heaters are avail-  
able in the same cabinet sizes as the current heaters.  
The firing rate of the unit can vary from 33% rated MBH up  
to the nameplate rating of the unit. The turn down ratios,  
therefore, is limited to 3:1.  
Heat Exchanger  
The heat exchanger drum, tubes and front and rear head-  
ers utilities the same materials as the standard two stage  
furnace.  
Unit control  
The unit is controlled by a supply air temperature sensor lo-  
cated in the supply air stream for VAV units. CV units have  
two sensors, one located in the supply air stream and the  
zone sensor. The temperature sensor signal is sent to the  
Heat module of the Intellipak® Unit Control. The control sig-  
nal from the Heat Module is an inverse proportional 5 -10V  
DC. The higher the voltage signal, the lower the call for  
heat.  
The 5 -10V DC. signal controls the angular position of the  
combustion air damper through a direct coupled damper ac-  
tuator motor. The position of the air damper in turn controls  
the combustion air pressure that is sensed by the modulat-  
ing gas valve. The greater the combustion air pressure, the  
greater the call for gas and the higher the firing rate of the  
heater. As the temperature setpoint is reached, the Modu-  
lating Heat control will cause the combustion air actuator to  
change the damper position to a lower firing rate that  
matches the heat load of the space.  
Modulating Gas Regulator Legend  
1. Adjustment and indication of the air to gas ratio.  
2. Adjustment and indication of the bias.  
3. Connection for the Ambient compensation line.  
4. Connection for the gas pressure sensing line.  
5. Connection for the air pressure sensing line.  
6. Stroke indication.  
1. To verify and check system optimum combustion, use  
Table 4-1 to program the limited modulating heat system  
components for 90% operation by scrolling through the  
Human Interface displays.  
Note: There are no serviceable parts on the SKP70  
actuator. Should it become inoperative, replace the  
actuator.  
98  
Unit Start-Up (Continued)  
Final Unit Checkout  
Figure 4-10  
Typical Gas Furnace  
After completing all of the checkout and start-up procedures  
outlined in the previous sections (i.e., operating the unit in  
each of its Modes through all available stages of cooling  
and heating), perform these final checks before leaving the  
unit:  
[ ] Close the disconnect switch or circuit protector switch  
that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal  
block 1TB1 or the unit mounted disconnect switch 1S14.  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage!  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK  
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.  
[ ] Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 "Off".  
[ ] Turn the 24 volt control circuit switch 1S70 to the "On"  
position.  
[ ] At the Human Interface Module, press the "SETUP" key.  
The LCD screen will display various preset "parameters  
of operation" based on the unit type, size, and the in-  
stalled options. Compare the factory preset information  
to the specified application requirements. If adjustments  
are required, follow the step-by-step instructions pro-  
vided in the appropriate SAHF-PTG manual for CV or  
VAV applications.  
[ ] Program the Night Setback (NSB) panel (if applicable) for  
proper unoccupied operation. Refer to the programming  
instructions for the specific panel.  
[ ] Verify that the Remote panel "System" selection switch,  
"Fan" selection switch, and "Zone Temperature" settings  
for constant volume systems are correct.  
[ ] Verify that the Remote panel "System" selection switch  
and the "Supply Air Temperature" settings for variable air  
volume systems are correct.  
[ ] Inspect the unit for misplaced tools, hardware, and de-  
bris.  
[ ] Turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S1 "On".  
[ ] Press the "AUTO" key at the Human Interface Module to  
begin system operation. The system will start automati-  
cally once the dampers modulate and a request for either  
heating or cooling has been given.  
[ ] Verify that all exterior panels including the control panel  
doors and condenser grilles are secured in place.  
99  
Service & Maintenance  
Table 5-1  
Control Settings and Time Delays  
Control Description  
Elec. Designation  
Contacts Open  
Contacts Closed  
Compressor Circuit Breakers  
S*HF 20 - 60  
S*HG 90 - 130  
1CB8 thru 1CB11  
1CB14 thru 1CB17  
See Table 5-2  
See Table 5-2  
See Table 5-2  
See Table 5-2  
Combustion Airflow Switch  
(Gas Heat Only)  
High Limit Cutout  
(Gas Heat Only)  
Supply Airflow Switch  
(Gas Heat Only)  
Disch High Limit  
(Electric Heat Only)  
Linear High Limit  
(Electric Heat Only)  
4S25  
4S26  
4S38  
4S27  
4S33  
see note 1  
250 + 15 F  
0.1 - 0.25" wc rise in press diff  
210 F  
0.03 - 0.12" wc  
133 + 5 F  
0.15 + 0.05" wc rise in press diff  
110 + 5 F  
185 + 10 F (std./UL)  
165 F + 10 F (CSA)  
145 F (std./UL)  
125 F (CSA)  
Freezestat  
(Hydronic Heat Only)  
Gas Heat Units  
4S12  
(N.O.) Auto Reset  
40 F  
Prepurge Timer: Fenwall  
Honeywell  
Sequencing Time Delay Relay  
Notes:  
4DL5  
4U18  
4DL6  
N.C. - timed to close  
internal timing function  
N.C. - timed to close  
60 seconds  
60 seconds  
60 seconds + 20%  
1. The combustion airflow switch (4S25) differential is 0.02" - 0.08" wc.  
Table 5-2  
Compressor Circuit Breakers (1CB8 - 1CB11 & 1CB14 - 1CB17) Electrical Characteristics  
200V  
230V  
460V  
575V  
Unit  
Size  
20  
Compr.  
Desig.  
A& B  
B
A
A& B  
1,2A& 1,2B  
1B, 2B  
1A, 2A  
1,2A& 1,2B  
1,2A& 1,2B  
1,2C  
1,2A& 1,2B  
1,2C  
1,2A& 1,2B  
1,2C  
Compr.  
Size  
9 ton  
14 ton  
9 ton  
14 ton  
9 ton  
14 ton  
9 ton  
14 ton  
14 ton  
14 ton  
9 ton  
Must  
Hold  
51  
76  
51  
76  
51  
76  
51  
76  
76  
76  
51  
76  
51  
76  
51  
76  
51  
76  
Must  
Trip  
58.7  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
87.4  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
Must  
Hold  
51  
76  
51  
76  
51  
76  
51  
76  
76  
76  
51  
76  
51  
76  
51  
76  
51  
76  
Must  
Trip  
58.7  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
87.4  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
Must  
Hold  
22.2  
33  
22.2  
33  
22.2  
33  
22.2  
33  
33  
33  
22.2  
33  
22.2  
33  
Must  
Trip  
25.5  
38  
25.5  
38  
25.5  
38  
25.5  
38  
38  
38  
25.5  
38  
25.5  
38  
Must  
Hold  
17.7  
26.4  
17.7  
26.4  
17.7  
26.4  
17.7  
26.4  
26.4  
26.4  
17.7  
26.4  
17.7  
26.4  
17.7  
26.4  
17.7  
26.4  
Must  
Trip  
20.4  
30.4  
20.4  
30.4  
20.4  
30.4  
20.4  
30.4  
30.4  
30.4  
20.4  
30.4  
20.4  
30.4  
20.4  
30.4  
20.4  
30.4  
25  
30  
40  
50  
55  
60  
70  
75 Std.  
75  
Hi-Cap 1,2A& 1,2B  
90  
14 ton  
9 ton  
15 ton  
10 ton  
15 ton  
10 ton  
15 ton  
22.2  
33  
22.2  
33  
25.5  
38  
25.5  
38  
1,2B & 1,2C  
1,2A  
105 1A,1B & 1C  
2A,2B & 2C  
115 1,2C & 1,2D  
1,2A& 1,2B  
130 1,2C & 1,2D  
1,2A& 1,2B  
15 ton  
10 ton  
14 ton  
76  
51  
76  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
76  
51  
76  
87.4  
58.7  
87.4  
33  
22.2  
33  
38  
25.5  
38  
26.4  
17.7  
26.4  
30.4  
20.4  
30.4  
100  
Service & Maintenance (Continued)  
Table 5-3  
Unit Internal Fuse Replacement Data & VFD Factory Settings  
101  
Service & Maintenance (Continued)  
Table 5-4  
Filter Data  
Panel-Type Filters  
(Note 1)  
Bag-Type Filters  
(Note 2)  
Cartridge Filters  
(box-type) (Note 2)  
Panel-Type Prefilters  
(Note 3)  
Unit Model  
Qty  
12  
Size of each  
20 X 20 X 2  
Qty. Size of each Qty. Size of each Qty.  
Size of each  
12 X 24 X 2  
24 X 24 X 2  
12 X 24 X 2  
24 X 24 X 2  
12 X 24 X 2  
24 X 24 X 2  
12 X 24 X 2  
24 X 24 X 2  
12 X 24 X 2  
24 X 24 X 2  
20 X 24 X 2  
24 X 24 X 2  
20 X 24 X 2  
24 X 24 X 2  
S_HF-C20 &  
C25  
S_HF-C30  
4
3
12 X 24 X 19  
24 X 24 X 19  
12 X 24 X 19  
24 X 24 X 19  
12 X 24 X 19  
24 X 24 X 19  
12 X 24 X 19  
24 X 24 X 19  
12 X 24 X 19  
24 X 24 X 19  
12 X 24 X 19  
24 X 24 X 19  
12 X 24 X 19  
24 X 24 X 19  
4
3
12 X 24 X 12  
24 X 24 X 12  
12 X 24 X 12  
24 X 24 X 12  
12 X 24 X 12  
24 X 24 X 12  
12 X 24 X 12  
24 X 24 X 12  
12 X 24 X 12  
24 X 24 X 12  
12 X 24 X 12  
24 X 24 X 12  
12 X 24 X 12  
24 X 24 X 12  
4
3
16  
16  
20  
35  
25  
25  
20 X 20 X 2  
20 X 25 X 2  
20 X 25 X 2  
16 X 20 X 2  
24 X 24 X 2  
24 X 24 X 2  
2
2
2
6
6
6
S_HF-C40  
5
5
5
6
6
6
S_HF-C50 &  
C55  
3
3
3
9
9
9
S_HF-C60,  
C70 & C75  
S_HG-C90 &  
S_HG-D11  
S_HG-D12 &  
S_HG-D13  
Notes:  
6
6
6
8
8
8
3
3
3
15  
3
15  
3
15  
3
15  
15  
15  
1. Dimensions shown for “Panel-Type Filters”apply to “Throw away”, “Cleanable Wire Mesh”,  
and “High Efficiency Throw away” Filters.  
2. S_HF units ordered with “Bag-Type Filters” or “Cartridge Filters” (box-type) include a bank  
of “Panel-Type Prefilters”.  
3. The same “Panel-Type Prefilters” are used with “Bag-Type” and “Cartridge (box-type)” filters.  
Table 5-5  
"Wet Heat" Coil Fin Data  
Total Coil  
Face Area  
(sq.ft.)  
Fins  
per  
Foot  
Fins  
per  
Foot  
Coil  
Type  
Coil  
Rows  
Model  
SLHF-C20,  
C25 & C30  
WC  
Prima Flo  
(hot water)  
WC  
Prima Flo  
(hot water)  
WC  
Prima Flo  
(hot water)  
WC  
Prima Flo  
(hot water)  
NS  
(steam)  
NS  
(steam)  
NS  
(steam)  
NS  
(steam)  
2
2
2
13.75  
19.25  
26.25  
80  
80  
80  
110  
110  
110  
SLHF-C40,  
C50 & C55  
SLHF-C60,  
C70 & C75  
SLHG-C90,  
D11, D12  
& D13  
2
1
1
1
1
17.5 (2)  
13.75  
80  
42  
42  
42  
52  
110  
96  
96  
72  
96  
SSHF-C20,  
C25 & C30  
SSHF-C40,  
C50 & C55  
SSHF-C60,  
C70 & C75  
SLHG-C90,  
D11, D12  
& D13  
13.75 (1)  
5.5 (1)  
18.75 (1)  
7.5 (1)  
17.5 (2)  
Note:  
To determine unit heating capacity (i.e., “low heat” or “high heat”),  
see Digit 9 of the model number stamped on the unit nameplate.  
102  
Service & Maintenance (Continued)  
Table 5-6  
Grease Recommendations  
Recommended  
Recommended Grease  
Exxon Unirex #2  
Mobil 532  
Operating Range  
-20 F to 250 F  
Mobil SHC #220  
Texaco Premium RB  
Table 5-7  
Refrigerant Coil Fin Data  
Coil  
Fin  
Fins  
per  
Foot  
148  
148  
156  
148  
148  
156  
148  
148  
168  
148  
148  
168  
148  
148  
168  
148  
148  
144  
164  
148  
168  
180  
n/a  
168  
148  
148  
168  
148  
148  
156  
180  
148  
156  
148  
n/a  
Coil Face  
Area  
Coil  
Type  
Tube  
Coil  
Rows  
2
4
3
2
4
3
3
4
3
2
4
3
3
4
3
3
4
4
2
4
4
3
n/a  
4
4
5
4
3
5
3
3
5
Tube  
Type  
I-F  
I-F  
smooth  
I-F  
I-F  
smooth  
I-F  
I-F  
smooth  
I-F  
I-F  
smooth  
I-F  
I-F  
smooth  
I-F  
I-F  
smooth  
I-F  
I-F  
smooth  
I-F  
n/a  
smooth  
I-F  
I-F  
smooth  
I-F  
I-F  
smooth  
I-F  
I-F  
smooth  
I-F  
n/a  
smooth  
I-F  
n/a  
smooth  
Model  
Config.  
wavy-3B  
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B  
wavy-3B 0.375"  
wavy-3B  
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B  
wavy-3B 0.375"  
wavy-3B  
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B  
wavy-3B 0.375"  
wavy-3B  
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B  
wavy-3B 0.375"  
wavy-3B  
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B  
wavy-3B 0.375"  
wavy-3B  
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B  
wavy-3B 0.375"  
wavy-3B  
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B  
Dia.  
0.5"  
0.5"  
(sq. ft.)  
20.30  
20.30  
35.00  
20.30  
20.30  
35.00  
24.40  
24.40  
46.30  
32.50  
32.50  
63.20  
37.90  
37.90  
70.00  
37.90  
37.90  
70.00  
43.10  
43.10  
88.00  
43.10  
n/a  
88.00  
43.10  
43.10  
88.00  
59.30  
59.30  
152.00  
60.40  
60.40  
152.00  
60.40  
n/a  
S*HF-C20 Evaporator  
Condenser  
S*HF-C25 Evaporator  
0.5"  
0.5"  
Condenser  
S*HF-C30 Evaporator  
0.5"  
0.5"  
Condenser  
S*HF-C40 Evaporator  
0.5"  
0.5"  
Condenser  
S*HF-C50 Evaporator  
0.5"  
0.5"  
Condenser  
S*HF-C55 Evaporator  
0.5"  
0.5"  
Condenser  
S*HF-C60 Evaporator  
0.5"  
0.5"  
Condenser  
S*HF-C70 Evaporator  
Hi-Cap Evaporator  
Condenser  
S*HF-C75 Evaporator  
wavy-3B 0.375"  
wavy-3B  
n/a  
wavy-3B 0.375"  
wavy-3B  
0.5"  
n/a  
0.5"  
0.5"  
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B  
Condenser  
S*HG-C90 Evaporator  
wavy-3B 0.375"  
wavy-3B  
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B  
wavy-3B 0.375"  
wavy-3B  
Hi-Cap Evaporator wavy-3B  
0.5"  
0.5"  
Condenser  
S*HG-D11 Evaporator  
0.5"  
0.5"  
Condenser  
S*HG-D12 Evaporator  
Hi-Cap Evaporator  
Condenser  
S*HG-D13 Evaporator  
wavy-3B 0.375"  
wavy-3B  
n/a  
wavy-3B 0.375"  
wavy-3B  
n/a  
4
5
n/a  
4
5
0.5"  
n/a  
156  
148  
n/a  
152.00  
60.40  
n/a  
0.5"  
n/a  
Hi-Cap Evaporator  
Condenser  
n/a  
4
wavy-3B 0.375"  
156  
152.00  
103  
Service & Maintenance (Continued)  
Fan Belt Adjustment  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage!  
The supply fan belts and optional exhaust fan belts must be  
inspected periodically to assure proper unit operation.  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
Replacement is necessary if the belts appear frayed or  
worn. Units with dual belts require a matched set of belts to  
ensure equal belt length.  
When removing or installing the new belts, do not stretch  
them over the sheaves. Loosen the belts using the belt ten-  
sion adjustment bolts on the motor mounting base.  
1. To determine the appropriate belt deflection;  
a. Measure the center-to-center shaft distance (in  
inches) between the fan and motor sheaves.  
Once the new belts are installed, using a Browning or  
Gates tension gauge (or equivalent) illustrated below; ad-  
just the belt tension as follows;  
b. Divide the distance measured in Step 1a by 64; the  
resulting value represents the amount of belt  
deflection that corresponds to the proper belt  
tension.  
2. Set the large O-ring on the belt tension gauge at the de-  
flection value determined in Step 1b.  
3. Set the small O-ring at zero on the force scale of the  
gauge plunger.  
4. Place the large end of the gauge at the center of the belt  
span; then depress the gauge plunger until the large O-  
ring is even with the top of the next belt—-or even with a  
straightedge placed across the fan and motor sheaves.  
Refer to Figure 5-1  
.
5. Remove the belt tension gauge. The small O-ring now in-  
dicates a number other than zero on the plunger’s force  
scale. This number represents the force (in pounds) re-  
quired to give the needed deflection.  
6. Compare the "force" scale reading (Step 5) with the ap-  
propriate “force” value listed in Figure 5-1. If the "force"  
reading is outside the range, readjust the belt tension.  
Note: Actual belt deflection "force" must not  
exceed the maximum “force” value shown in  
Figure 5-1.  
7. Recheck the belt tension at least twice during the first 2  
to 3 days of operation. Belt tension will decrease rapidly  
until the new belts are “run in”.  
104  
Service & Maintenance (Continued)  
Figure 5-1  
Belt Tension Measurement and Deflection Ranges  
Deflection Force (Lbs.)  
Super  
Steel Cable  
Belts  
Gripbelts  
Gripnotch  
Gripbelts  
Cross Small P.D  
Section Range  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min. Max  
3.0 -3.6  
3.8 - 4.8 3 1/2  
5.0 - 7.0  
3.4 - 4.2  
4.4 - 5.6 5 1/8  
3
4 1/2  
5
5 1/2  
5 1/2  
7 1/8  
8 3/4  
3 7/8  
4 1/2  
5
5 3/4  
6 1/2  
5 1/2  
6 1/4  
6 7/8  
8
3 1/4  
4
A
B
3 3/4 4 3/4  
4 1/4 5 1/4  
4 1/2 5 1/2  
5 3/4 7 1/4  
4
4
9 1/8  
5.8 - 8.8 6 3/8  
7 3/8 10 1/8  
7
8 3/4  
Deflection Force (Lbs.)  
358  
358 Gripnotch  
Belt  
Gripbelts  
Belts  
Min.  
10  
Cross Small P.D  
Section Range  
Min.  
Max.  
Max.  
4.4 - 8.7 ------  
------  
15  
5V  
7.1 - 10.9 10 1/2 15 3/4 12 7/8 18 3/4  
11.8 - 16.0 13 19 1/2 15 22  
Anytime a compressor is replaced, the oil for each com-  
pressor within the manifolded set must be replaced.  
Scroll Compressor Replacement  
The compressor manifold system was purposely designed  
to provide proper oil return to each compressors. The refrig-  
erant manifold system must not be modified in any way.  
The scroll compressor uses Trane OIL-42 without substitu-  
tion. The appropriate oil charge for a 9 and 10 Ton scroll  
compressor is 8.5 pints. For a 14 and 15 Ton scroll com-  
pressor, use 13.8 pints.  
Note: Altering the compressor manifold piping may  
cause oil return problems and compressor failure.  
Note: Do Not release refrigerant to the  
atmosphere! If adding or removing refrigerant is  
required, the service technician must comply with  
all Federal, State and local laws. Refer to general  
service bulletin MSCU-SB-1 (latest edition).  
Should a compressor replacement become necessary and  
a suction line filter drier is to be installed, install it a mini-  
mum of 18 inches upstream of the oil separator tee. See  
Figure 5-2.  
Figure 5-2  
Suction Line Filter/Drier Installation  
TOP VIEW  
Compressor Bracket  
Do Not Remove  
Common Suction Line from Evaporator  
Minimum 18" straight unobstructed  
piping between the Suction Filter/Drier  
and the first Oil Separator Tee.  
30 Ton Compressor Pair Illustrated  
Oil Separator Tee  
105  
Service & Maintenance (Continued)  
Table 5-8  
Supply and Exhaust Fan VFD Programming Parameters  
Menu  
Parameter Description  
Setting  
Description  
Set only for applications using 3hp Hi-  
Efficiency motors. Set to 2.2 kW.  
Set only for 200/230v 60hz & 380/415  
50hz applications  
102  
103  
Motor Power Set Based on Motor Nameplate  
Motor Voltage Set Based on Motor Nameplate  
Load  
&
Motor  
105  
106  
Motor Current Set Based on Motor Nameplate Sets the motor FLA  
Motor RPM Set Based on Motor Nameplate Sets the motor RPM  
Reference  
&
215  
Current Limit 1 x Rated Current  
Limits the maximum current to motor  
Limits  
* These parameters are motor specific and the actual motor nameplate rating must be used. Do not use the unit name  
plate values.  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage!  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage! w/Capacitors!  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently  
energized. For variable frequency drives or other en-  
ergy storing components provided by Trane or others,  
refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s literature for al-  
lowable waiting periods for discharge of capacitors.  
Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors  
have discharged. Failure to disconnect power and dis-  
charge capacitors before servicing could result in death  
or serious injury.  
HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT TERMINAL BLOCK  
1TB1 OR UNIT DISCONNECT SWITCH 1S14.  
3. To modify parameters:  
(a) Press the Extended Menu button  
(b) Press the Left or Right Arrow button to scroll  
through menus  
(c) Press the up or down arrow to scroll through  
parameter settings within a specified menu  
(d) Press the Change Data button to allow a parameter  
value to be changed  
(e) Press the Up or Down arrow button to change the  
parameter  
(f) Press OK button when desired change has been  
made.  
Note: For additional information regarding the safe dis-  
charge of capacitors, see PROD-SVB06A-EN  
VFD Programming Parameters  
Units shipped with an optional variable frequency drive  
(VFD) are preset and run tested at the factory. If a problem  
with a VFD occurs, ensure that the programmed param-  
eters listed in Table 5-8 have been set before replacing the  
drive.  
4. Repeat step (3) for each menu selection setting in Table  
5-8.  
Note: Check to make sure that parameter 104 is set  
to 60 Hz. To check parameter 104 press the  
Extended Menu button, press the Left Arrow button  
until menu Load & Motor is shown, press the up  
arrow until parameter 104 is displayed. Parameter  
104 can then be modified by pressing the Change  
Data button and then the Up Arrow button. When  
the desired selection has been made press the OK  
button.  
5. To reset all programming parameters back to the factory  
defaults:  
(g) Press the Extended Menu button  
(h) Press the Left or Right Arrow button to scroll to the  
KEYB. & DISPLAY menu.  
(i) Press the Down Arrow button to scroll to the Active  
Setup menu.  
(j) Press the Change Data button.  
(k) Press the Up Arrow button to scroll to the Factory  
Default setting.  
(l) Press the OK button.  
(m) Press the Up Arrow button to scroll to the Setup  
Copy menu.  
(n) Press the Change Data button.  
(o) Press the Up Arrow button to scroll to the Copy to  
Setup 1 setting.  
Should replacing the a VFD become necessary, the re-  
placement is not configured with all of Trane's operating  
parameters. The VFD must be programmed before at-  
tempting to operate the unit.  
To verify and/or program a VFD, use the following steps:  
1. At the unit, turn the 115 volt control circuit switch 1S70 to  
the "Off" position.  
(p) Press the OK button.  
2. Turn the 24 volt control circuit switch to the "Off' position.  
106  
(q) Press the Up Arrow button to scroll to the Active  
Setup menu.  
(r) Press the Change Data button.  
(s) Press the Up Arrow button to scroll to the Setup 1  
setting.  
Service & Maintenance (Continued)  
Monthly Maintenance  
Before completing the following checks, turn the unit OFF  
and lock the main power disconnect switch open.  
(t) Press the OK button.  
(v) Press the Change Data button.  
(w) Press the Up Arrow button to scroll to the Down  
load All Parameters setting.  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage!  
(x) Press the OK button  
Note: Item 5 resets the drive to the default factory  
settings. The program parameters listed in Table 5-  
8 will need to be verified or changed as described in  
Item 3 and 4.  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
Note: Some of the parameters listed in the Table are  
motor specific. Due to various motors and  
efficiencies available, use only the values stamped  
on the specific motor nameplate. Do not use the  
Unit nameplate values.  
Filters  
[ ] Inspect the return air filters. Clean or replace them if nec-  
essary. Refer to the Table 5-4 for filter information.  
Cooling Season  
6. Follow the start-up procedures for supply fan in the "Vari  
able Air Volume System" section or the "Exhaust Airflow  
Measurement" start-up procedures for the exhaust fan.  
[ ] Check the unit’s drain pans and condensate piping to  
ensure that there are no blockages.  
7. After verifying that the VFD(s) are operating properly,  
press the STOP key at the Human Interface Module to  
stop the unit operation.  
[ ] Inspect the evaporator and condenser coils for dirt, bent  
fins, etc. If the coils appear dirty, clean them according to  
the instructions described in “Coil Cleaning” later in this  
section.  
8. Follow the applicable steps in the "Final Unit Checkout"  
section to return the unit to its normal operating mode.  
[ ] Manually rotate the condenser fans to ensure free move-  
ment and check motor bearings for wear. Verify that all of  
the fan mounting hardware is tight.  
[ ] Inspect the F/A-R/A damper hinges and pins to ensure  
that all moving parts are securely mounted. Keep the  
blades clean as necessary.  
[ ] Verify that all damper linkages move freely; lubricate with  
white grease, if necessary.  
[ ] Check supply fan motor bearings; repair or replace the  
motor as necessary.  
[ ] Check the fan shaft bearings for wear. Replace the bear-  
ings as necessary.  
[ ] Lubricate the supply fan bearings with a lithium based  
grease. Refer to Table 5-6 for recommended greases.  
Note: The bearings are manufactured using a  
special synthetic lithium based grease designed for  
long life and minimum lube intervals. Over  
lubrication can be just as harmful as not enough.  
Use a hand grease gun to lubricate these bearings; add  
grease until a light bead appears all around the seal. Do not  
over lubricate!  
After greasing the bearings, check the setscrews to ensure  
that the shaft is held securely to the bearings and fan  
wheels. Make sure that all bearing supports are tight.  
[ ] Check the supply fan belt(s). If the belts are frayed or  
worn, replace them. Refer to the "Fan Belt Adjustment"  
section for belt replacement and adjustments.  
107  
Service & Maintenance (Continued)  
After greasing the bearings, check the setscrews to ensure  
that the shaft is held securely. Make sure that all bearing  
braces are tight.  
[ ] Check the condition of the gasket around the control  
panel doors. These gaskets must fit correctly and be in  
good condition to prevent water leakage.  
[ ] Inspect both the main unit control panel and heat section  
control box for loose electrical components and terminal  
connections, as well as damaged wire insulation. Make  
any necessary repairs.  
[ ] Verify that all wire terminal connections are tight.  
[ ] Remove any corrosion present on the exterior surfaces  
of the unit and repaint these areas.  
[ ] Gas Heat Units only - Check the heat exchanger for any  
corrosion, cracks, or holes.  
[ ] Generally inspect the unit for unusual conditions (e.g.,  
loose access panels, leaking piping connections, etc.)  
[ ] Check the combustion air blower for dirt. Clean as neces-  
sary.  
[ ] Make sure that all retaining screws are reinstalled in the  
unit access panels once these checks are complete.  
[ ] With the unit running, check and record the:  
Note: Typically, it is not necessary to clean the gas  
furnace. However, if cleaning does become  
necessary, remove the burner inspection plate from  
the rear of the heat exchanger to access the drum.  
Be sure to replace the existing gaskets with new  
ones before reinstalling the inspection plate.  
ambient temperature;  
compressor oil level (each circuit);  
compressor suction and discharge pressures (each  
circuit);  
superheat and subcooling (each circuit);  
Record this data on an “operator’s maintenance log” like  
the one shown in Table 5-8. If the operating pressures in-  
dicate a refrigerant shortage, measure the system super-  
heat and system subcooling. For guidelines, refer to  
"Charging by Subcooling".  
[ ] Open the main gas valve and apply power to the unit  
heating section; then initiate a "Heat" test using the start-  
up procedure described in "Gas Furnace Start-Up".  
WARNING  
Note: Do Not release refrigerant to the  
atmosphere! If adding or removing refrigerant is  
required, the service technician must comply with  
all federal, state and local laws. Refer to general  
service bulletin MSCU-SB-1 (latest edition).  
Hazardous Gases and Flammable Vapors!  
Exposure to hazardous gases from fuel substances  
have been shown to cause cancer, birth defects or  
other reproductive harm. Improper installation, adjust-  
ment, alteration, service or use of this product could  
cause flammable mixtures. To avoid hazardous gases  
and flammable vapors follow proper installation and set  
up of this product and all warnings as provided in this  
manual. Failure to follow all instructions could result in  
death or serious injury.  
Heating Season  
Before completing the following checks, turn the unit OFF  
and lock the main power disconnect switch open.  
When using dry nitrogen cylinders for pressurizing  
units for leak testing, always provide a pressure regula-  
tor on the cylinder to prevent excessively high unit  
pressures. Never pressurize unit above the maximum  
recommended unit test pressure as specified in appli-  
cable unit literature. Failure to properly regulate pres-  
sure could result in a violent explosion, which could re-  
sult in death or serious injury or equipment or prop-  
erty-only-damage.  
WARNING  
Hazardous Voltage!  
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-  
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout  
procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvert-  
ently energized. Failure to disconnect power before ser-  
vicing could result in death or serious injury.  
[ ] Verify that the ignition system operates properly.  
[ ] Inspect the unit’s air filters. If necessary, clean or replace  
them.  
Coil Cleaning  
[ ] Check supply fan motor bearings; repair or replace the  
motor as necessary.  
Regular coil maintenance, including annual cleaning—en-  
hances the unit’s operating efficiency by minimizing:  
[ ] Lubricate the supply fan bearings with a lithium based  
grease. Refer to Table 5-6 for recommended greases.  
compressor head pressure and amperage draw;  
water carryover;  
fan brake horsepower; and,  
static pressure losses.  
Note: The bearings are manufactured using a  
special synthetic lithium based grease designed for  
long life and minimum lube intervals. Too much  
lubrication in a bearing can be just as harmful as  
not enough.  
At least once each year—or more often if the unit is located  
in a “dirty” environment—clean the evaporator and con-  
denser coils using the instructions outlined below. Be sure  
to follow these instructions as closely as possible to avoid  
damaging the coils.  
Use a hand grease gun to lubricate the bearings; add  
grease until a light bead appears all around the seal. Do not  
over lubricate!  
108  
Service & Maintenance (Continued)  
Note: Refrigerant oil is detrimental to some roofing  
materials. Care must be taken to protect the roof  
from oil leaks or spills.  
CAUTION  
Coil Cleaners!  
Coil cleaners can damage roofs, surrounding buildings,  
vehicles, etc. Cleaning substances should be checked  
to ensure that they will not cause damage to surround-  
ings. Coils and roof (if applicable) should berinsed thor-  
oughly. Do not spray coil cleaners in windy conditions.  
4. Pour the cleaning solution into the sprayer. If a high-  
pressure sprayer is used:  
a. Do not allow the sprayer pressure to exceed 600  
psi. The minimum spray nozzle angle is 15 degrees.  
Refrigerant Coils  
b. Spray the solution perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to  
the coil face.  
To clean refrigerant coils, use a soft brush and a sprayer  
(either a garden pump-up type or a high-pressure sprayer).  
A high-quality detergent is also required; suggested  
brands include “SPREX A.C., “OAKITE 161”, “OAKITE  
166” and “COILOX”. If the detergent selected is strongly al-  
kaline (pH value exceeds 8.5), add an inhibitor.  
c. Maintain a minimum clearance of 6" between the  
sprayer nozzle and the coil.  
5. Spray the leaving-airflow side of the coil first; then spray  
the opposite side of the coil. Allow the cleaning solution  
to stand on the coil for five minutes.  
1. Remove the access panels on both sides of the unit and  
the filters.  
6. Rinse both sides of the coil with cool, clean water.  
7. Inspect both sides of the coil; if it still appears to be dirty,  
repeat Steps 7 and 8.  
WARNING  
No Step Surface!  
8. Reinstall all of the components and panels removed in  
Step 2; then restore power to the unit.  
Do not walk on the sheet metal drain pan.Walking on the  
drain pan could cause the supporting metal to collapse.  
Failure of the drain pan could result in death or serious  
injury.  
Steam or Hot Water Coils  
To clean a steam or hot water coil, use a soft brush, a  
steam-cleaning machine, and water.  
Note: Bridging between the unit's main supports  
may consist of multiple 2 by 12 boards or sheet  
metal grating.  
1. Verify that switches 1S1 and 1S70 are turned "OFF", and  
that the main unit disconnect is locked open.  
2. Straighten any bent coil fins with a fin comb. (Use the  
data in Table 5-7 to determine the appropriate fin comb  
size.)  
2. Remove enough panels and components from the unit  
to gain sufficient access to the coil.  
3. Straighten any bent coil fins with a fin comb. (Use the  
data in Table 5-5 to determine the appropriate fin comb  
size.)  
3. Mix the detergent with water according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions. If desired, heat the solution  
to 150 F maximum to improve its cleansing capability.  
4. Remove loose dirt and debris from both sides of the coil  
with a soft brush.  
WARNING  
5. Use the steam-cleaning machine to clean the leaving-air  
side of the coil first; start at the top of the coil and work  
downward; then clean the entering-air side of the coil,  
starting at the top of the coil and working downward.  
Contains Refrigerant!  
System contains oil and refrigerant under high pres-  
sure. Recover refrigerant to relieve pressure before  
opening the system. See unit nameplate for refrigerant  
type. Do not use non-approved refrigerants, refrigerant  
substitutes, or refrigerant additives.  
6. Check both sides of the coil; if it still appears dirty, repeat  
Step 5.  
Failure to follow proper procedures or the use of non-ap-  
proved refrigerants, refrigerant substitutes, or refriger-  
ant additives could result in death or serious injury or  
equipment damage.  
7. Reinstall all of the components and panels removed in  
Step 2; then restore power to the unit.  
6. Rinse both sides of the coil with cool, clean water.  
7. Inspect both sides of the coil; if it still appears to be dirty,  
repeat Steps 7 and 8.  
8. Reinstall all of the components and panels removed in  
Step 2; then restore power to the unit.  
109  
Service & Maintenance (Continued)  
Complete Unit Model Number:  
Final Process  
For future reference, you may find it helpful to record the  
unit data in the blanks provided.  
Unit Serial Number:  
Unit "DL" Number ("Design special" units only):  
Wiring Diagram Numbers (from unit control panel):  
—schematic(s)  
—connections  
Unit Address (TCI)  
Network ID (LCI)  
Table 5-8 Sample Operator's Maintenance Log (See Note)  
Refrigerant Circuit #1  
Current  
Refrigerant Circuit #2  
Ambient Compr. Suct. Disch. Liquid Super- Sub- Compr. Suct. Disch. Liquid Super- Sub-  
Temp.  
(F)  
Oil  
Press. Press. Press. heat  
cool.  
(F)  
Oil  
Press. Press. Press. heat  
cool.  
(F)  
Date  
Level (Psig) (Psig) (Psig)  
(F)  
Level (Psig) (Psig) (Psig)  
(F)  
- ok  
- ok  
- low  
- low  
- ok  
- ok  
- low  
- low  
- ok  
- ok  
- low  
- low  
- ok  
- ok  
- low  
- low  
- ok  
- ok  
- low  
- low  
- ok  
- ok  
- low  
- low  
- ok  
- ok  
- low  
- low  
- ok  
- ok  
- low  
- low  
- ok  
- ok  
- low  
- low  
- ok  
- ok  
- low  
- low  
Note:  
Check and record the data requested above each month during the cooling season with the unit running.  
110  
Index  
A
D
AC Conductors ................................................................. 45  
See Table 3-8  
Adjusting the Fresh Air Damper ...................................... 80  
Airflow Measurements ..................................................... 63  
Damper Adjustment ...........................................................93  
See Low Ambient Dampers  
Damper Installation............................................................94  
See Low Ambient Dampers  
Daytime Warm-up .............................................................. 11  
DC Conductors ..................................................................45  
See Table 3-9  
B
Dimensional data ........................................................ 15-20  
See Table 3-1A: Table 3-1B: Table 3-1C;  
Table 3-2A: Table 3-2B: Table 3-2C  
DIP switch settings - TCI .....................................................7  
discharge pressure approaches 405 ± 7 psig .....................9  
discharge pressure decreases to approximately 300 .........9  
Dry Airside Pressure Drop ........................................... 70-72  
See Figure 4-3 (Standard & HI Cap)  
DSP control devices ..........................................................31  
See Figure 3-9: Units with Statitrac  
BAYSENS008B ................................................................ 49  
See Figure 3-16  
BAYSENS010B ................................................................ 49  
See Figure 3-16; Remote Panel w/o NSB  
BAYSENS013C ........................................................... 49-53  
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17  
BAYSENS014C ........................................................... 49-53  
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17  
BAYSENS016A ........................................................... 49-53  
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17; Outside Air Sensor  
(3RT3) - BAYSENS016A  
E
BAYSENS017B ........................................................... 49-53  
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17  
BAYSENS019* ................................................................. 49  
See Figure 3-16  
BAYSENS020* ................................................................. 52  
"efficiency check point" setting ............................................9  
Electric Heat ......................................................................58  
electric heat units operating on 200/230 volts ................ 39  
See Figure 3-14  
See Figure 3-17  
BAYSENS021A ................................................................ 52  
See Figure 3-17  
Belt Tension Measurement and Deflection Ranges ..... 105  
Electrical Service Sizing Data ...........................................41  
See Table 3-7  
Electrical Service Sizing Equations ................................ 43  
See Figure 3-15  
See Figure 5-1  
Emergency Stop Switch (5S71) ...................................... 48  
Evaporator Temperature Sensor ........................................8  
Exhaust Air Dampers ....................................................... 80  
Exhaust Airflow Measurement ......................................... 66  
Exhaust Fan Performance ........................................... 77-79  
See Table 4-3: Table 4-4  
Exhaust/Comparative Enthalpy Module ..............................7  
External Auto/Stop Switch (5S67) .............................. 49-53  
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17  
C
Cautions ..............................................................................6  
Center-of-Gravity.............................................................. 21  
See Figure 3-3  
Charging by Subcooling .................................................. 93  
Coil Cleaning ................................................................. 108  
Combustion Air Adjustment ............................................. 95  
See High-Fire Adjustment: Full Modulating Gas  
Furnace: Limited Modulating Gas Furnace  
Component Static Pressure Drops.................................. 76  
See Table 4-2  
Compressor Assembly Shipping Hardware.................... 27  
See Figure 3-7A: Figure 3-7B: Figure 3-7C  
Compressor Circuit Breakers ................................. 10, 100  
See Table 5-2  
Compressor Locations.......................................................84  
See Figure 4-6  
F
F/A Damper Travel Adjustment ........................................ 82  
See Table 4-5  
factory mounted disconnect switch ...................................38  
Fan Belt Adjustment ....................................................... 104  
Fan Performance with Inlet Guide Vanes ................... 73-75  
See Figure 4-4  
Fan Performance without Inlet Guide  
Compressor Module ............................................................7  
Compressor Module (SCM) detects a problem.................10  
Compressor Motor Winding Thermostats .........................10  
Compressor Sounds ..........................................................83  
concealed damage ............................................................14  
Condensate Trap Installation.............................................27  
See Figure 3-6  
Vanes ........................................................................... 67-69  
See Figure 4-2  
Fan Rotation ......................................................................63  
fans are rotating backwards ..............................................63  
Fenwal Ignition System .....................................................56  
See Two Stage Gas Furnace  
Field Connection Diagram Notes ............................... 49-53  
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17  
Condenser Fan Location ...................................................64  
See Figure 4-1  
Filter Data ........................................................................102  
See Table 5-4  
Filter Switch .........................................................................8  
Filters ...................................................................... 102, 107  
See Filter Data: Table 5-4: Filter Switch  
Flame Failure ............................................................... 96-97  
See Modulating Gas  
Float-and-Thermostatic (FT) type trap ............................. 37  
See Figure 3-13  
Flue Assembly ...................................................................34  
condensing temperature rises above the "lower limit" ......9  
Connection Sizes for Hot Water & Steam Coil................ 35  
See Table 3-5  
Constant Volume Systems ................................................63  
Constant Volume Zone Panel............................................46  
Control Settings and Time Delays ...................................100  
See Table 5-1  
Customer Connection Wire Range ...................................40  
See Table 3-6  
CV Control Options ..................................................... 49-53  
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17  
111  
Measuring Subcooling..................................................... 93  
See Charging by Subcooling  
See Figure 3-11  
Flue Gas Carbon Dioxide & Oxygen Measurements ..... 96  
Measuring Superheat ........................................................93  
Minimum Position Potentiometer ......................................47  
Model Number Description ............................................ 4 - 5  
Modulating Gas..................................................................57  
Modulating Gas Furnace ................................................. 97  
Modulating Gas Heat control .................................... 97 - 98  
See Full Modulating Gas Furnace: Limited  
See Figure 4-7  
Freeze Protection ..............................................................58  
Freezestat ..........................................................................10  
Fresh Air & Return Air Damper ................................... 80-81  
See Figure 4-5: Table 4-5  
Frostat Control ...................................................................55  
Fuse replacement data ....................................................101  
Modulating Gas Furnace  
Modulating Gas Regulator.................................................98  
See Figure 4-9  
G
Modulating Gas Train ........................................................34  
See Figure 3-10  
Morning Warm-Up .............................................................10  
motor winding temperature decreases  
to approximate ...................................................................10  
motor windings exceeds approximately 221 F ..................10  
Gas Trains ..........................................................................33  
See 235 and 350 MBH: 500 and 850 MBH:  
1000 MBH and Modulating  
Gas Valve Adjustment Screw Locations............................96  
See Figure 4-8  
"Gate" type valve ......................................................... 36-37  
See Figure 3-12: Figure 3-13  
GBAS Analog Input Wiring Diagram .................................54  
See Figure 3-18; GBAS Voltage vs Setpoint  
GBAS Voltage vs Setpoint.................................................54  
See Figure 3-18  
N
nameplate location ..............................................................6  
Natural Gas Combustion Curve ........................................96  
See Table 4-8  
Generic Building Automation System ................................48  
Generic Building Automation System Module .....................8  
Grease Recommendations ..............................................103  
See Table 5-6  
O
Occupied Cooling .............................................................. 11  
Occupied Heating .............................................................. 11  
Occupied/Unoccupied Contacts ....................................... 47  
Operating Pressure Curve........................................... 85-92  
See Table 4-6 (Standard & Hi Cap)  
Operation and Service Clearances ...................................15  
Operator's Maintenance Log .......................................... 110  
See Table 5-8  
ordering replacement parts ................................................ 4  
Outdoor Air Humidity Sensor ............................................. 9  
Outside Air Pressure Sensor ........................................... 31  
Outside Air Sensor ........................................................... 31  
See Figure 3-9  
H
Head Pressure Control ........................................................9  
Heat Exchanger ............................................................... 98  
See Limited Modulating Gas Furnace;  
Modulating Gas Furnace  
Heat Module ........................................................................7  
heating coil falls to 40 F.....................................................10  
High Duct Temp Thermostats(3S16, 3S17) ......................10  
high duct thermostat can be reset .....................................10  
High Pressure Controls .......................................................9  
High-Fire Adjustment .........................................................95  
See Two Stage Gas Furnace  
Honeywell Ignition System ................................................56  
See Two Stage Gas Furnace  
P
Hot Water Piping................................................................36  
See Figure 3-12  
Human Interface Module ....................................................7  
See also appropriate SAHF-PTG manual  
P-Traps at the unit ........................................................... 27  
See Figure 3-6  
Power Wire Sizing and Protection Device Equations..... 43  
See Figure 3-15  
Propane Gas......................................................................56  
I
R
Interprocessor Communications Board..............................7  
Refrigerant Charging .........................................................83  
Refrigerant Coil Fin Data .................................................103  
See Table 5-7  
L
Refrigerant Coils ..............................................................109  
See Coil Cleaning  
Remote Human Interface Module .................................... 46  
Remote Panel w/ NSB .......................................................45  
See BAYSENS019*: BAYSENS020*  
Remote Panel w/o NSB ............................................ 45, 46  
See BAYSENS010B: BAYSENS021A  
Remote Zone Sensor ........................................................46  
request for exhaust fan operation .......................................8  
request for supply fan operation..........................................8  
requesting service .............................................................. 4  
required number of conductors .................................. 49-53  
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17  
Lead-Lag..............................................................................9  
Lead/Lag Operation ......................................................... 56  
Limited Modulating Gas Furnace .................................... 98  
Low Ambient Compressor Lockout ................................. 10  
Low Ambient Control ......................................................... 9  
Low Ambient Dampers ................................................... 93  
Low Pressure Control ........................................................ 9  
Low-Fire Adjustment ........................................................ 95  
See Two Stage Gas Furnace  
M
Manifold Pressures and CO2 Levels.................................96  
See Gas Furnace Start-Up: Table 4-7  
Return Air Humidity Sensor ................................................ 9  
112  
Return Air Humidity Sensor (3U64) .................................. 8  
return air temperature reaches 135 F ............................. 10  
Rooftop Module...................................................................7  
RTM Resistance Input vs Setpoint Temperatures ............. 7  
RTM Resistance Value vs System Operating Mode ..........7  
See VOM Contacts: FIgure 3-16: Figure 3-17  
U
unit and curb operating weights ........................................22  
See Table 3-3  
Unit Internal Fuse Replacement Data & VFD  
Factory Settings...............................................................101  
See Table 5-3  
units electric heat units operating on 460/575 vol.......... 39  
See Figure 3-14  
S
Sample Model Number ....................................................4–5  
Sample Operator's Maintenance Log .............................. 110  
See Table 5-8  
Saturated Condenser Temperature Sensors ..................... 9  
saturated condensing temperature falls ............................ 9  
Scroll Compressor Replacement ....................................105  
See Figure 5-2  
Service Test Guide for Component Operation ................. 61  
See Table 4-1  
"Shipwith" Locations ......................................................... 11  
Sizing Natural Gas Pipe Mains & Branches......................33  
See Table 3-4  
units operating on 200/230 volts .......................................38  
units operating on 460/575 volts ...................................... 38  
Units with an Economizer ................................................ 55  
Units with TraqTM Sensor ................................................ 55  
Units without an Economizer ............................................ 55  
Unoccupied Heating ......................................................... 11  
unoccupied to an occupied mode with  
the MWU option ................................................................ 10  
some fans are rotating backwards ....................................63  
See Fan Rotation  
V
Space Pressure Transducer ...................................... 10, 31  
See Figure 3-9  
Status/Annunciator Output ..................................................9  
Steam or Hot Water Coils .................................. 36, 37, 109  
See Coil Cleaning; Figure 3-12: Figure 3-13:  
"Wet Heat"  
Variable Air Volume Systems ........................................... 65  
VAV Changeover Contacts .............................................. 46  
VAV Control Option ..................................................... 49-53  
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17  
VCM optional CO2 sensor................................................. 8  
VCM optional temperature sensor .................................... 8  
Velocity Pressure Transducer/Solenoid Assembly ........... 8  
Ventilation Control Module ................................................ 8  
Ventilation Override Module .............................................. 7  
VFD Programming Parameters ..................................... 106  
See Table 5-8  
Voltage Imbalance ............................................................ 60  
Voltage Supply .................................................................. 60  
VOM Contacts .................................................................. 47  
See VOM Modes  
VOM Mode “A” .................................................................. 47  
See VOM Contacts  
VOM Mode “B” ...................................................................47  
See VOM Contacts  
VOM Mode “C...................................................................47  
See VOM Contacts  
VOM Mode “D...................................................................47  
See VOM Contacts  
VOM Mode “E” .................................................................. 47  
See VOM Contacts  
Suction Line Filter/Drier Installation ............................... 105  
See Figure 5-2  
suction pressure approaches 7 ± 4 psig .............................9  
suction pressure exceeds 22 ± 4 psig................................ 9  
supply air temperature falls 10 F below .......................... 10  
Supply Air Temperature Low Limit.................................... 10  
supply air temperature reaches 10 F above .................... 10  
supply air temperature reaches 240 F ............................. 10  
Supply Air Temperature Sensor (3RT9) ............................ 8  
Supply Air Tempering........................................................ 10  
Supply and Exhaust Airflow Proving Switch....................... 8  
Supply and Exhaust Fan Circuit Breakers ........................ 9  
Supply and Exhaust Fan Shipping Channels ................. 30  
See Figure 3-8  
Supply and Exhaust Fan VFD Programming  
Parameters ......................................................................106  
See Table 5-8  
Supply Duct Static Pressure Control ............................... 11  
swing-check vacuum breaker .......................................... 37  
See Figure 3-13  
W
T
Warnings ............................................................................. 6  
Wet Airside Pressure Drop ......................................... 70-72  
See Figure 4-3  
Wet Heat ............................................................................58  
“Wet” heat actuator ............................................................58  
"Wet Heat" Coil Fin Data .................................................102  
See Table 5-5  
"temporary low limit suppression" setting ...........................9  
Thermostatic Expansion Valves ....................................... 83  
Trane Communications Interface Module ...........................7  
Trane OIL-42......................................................................83  
Transducer Voltage Output vs Pressure Input ................. 10  
TraqTM Sensor Airflow Measurement ............................. 66  
Two Stage Gas Furnace .................................................. 56  
Typical Field Power Wiring............................................... 39  
See Figure 3-14  
Z
Typical Field Wiring Diagram ..................................... 49-53  
See Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17  
Typical Gas Furnace......................................................... 99  
See Figure 4-10  
Zone Temperature - Cooling..............................................10  
Zone Temperature - Heating .............................................10  
Typical Ventilation Override Binary  
Output Wiring ............................................................... 50-53  
113  
WARRANTY AND LIABILITY CLAUSE  
COMMERCIAL EQUIPMENT  
RATED 20 TONS AND LARGER AND RELATED ACCESSORIES  
PRODUCTS COVERED - This warranty* is extended by  
THE WARRANTY AND LIABILITY SET  
American Standard Inc. and applies only to commercial  
FORTH HEREIN ARE IN LIEU OF ALL  
equipment rated 20 Tons and larger and related accesso-  
OTHER WARRANTIES AND LIABILITIES,  
ries.  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR IN NEGLI-  
The Company warrants for a period of 12 months from ini-  
GENCE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN LAW  
tial start-up or 18 months from date of shipment, whichever  
OR IN FACT, INCLUDING IMPLIED WAR-  
is less, that the Company products covered by this order  
(1) are free from defects in material and workmanship and  
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  
(2) have the capacities and ratings set forth in the  
FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR USE, IN NO  
Company’s catalogs and bulletins, provided that no war-  
EVENT SHALL WARRANTOR BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUEN-  
TIAL DAMAGES.  
ranty is made against corrosion, erosion or deterioration.  
The Company’s obligations and liabilities under this war-  
ranty are limited to furnishing f.o.b. factory or warehouse at  
Company designated shipping point, freight allowed to  
Buyer’s city (or port of export for shipment outside the con-  
terminous United States) replacement equipment (or at the  
option of the Company parts therefore) for all Company  
products not conforming to this warranty and which have  
been returned to the manufacturer. The Company shall not  
be obligated to pay for the cost of lost refrigerant. No liabil-  
ity whatever shall attach to the Company until said prod-  
ucts have been paid for and then said liability shall be lim-  
ited to the purchase price of the equipment shown to be  
defective.  
Manager - Product Service  
American Standard Inc.  
Clarksville, Tn 37040-1008  
PW-215-2688  
*A 10 year limited warranty is provided on optional Full  
Modulation Gas Heat Exchanger.  
*Optional Extended Warranties are available for compres-  
sors and heat exchangers of Combination Gas-Electric Air  
Conditioning Units.  
The Company makes certain further warranty protection  
available on an optional extra-cost basis. Any further war-  
ranty must be in writing, signed by an officer of the Com-  
pany.  
The warranty and liability set forth herein are in lieu of all  
other warranties and liabilities, whether in contract or in  
negligence, express or implied, in law or in fact, including  
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for par-  
ticular use. In no event shall the Company be liable for any  
incidental or consequential damages.  
CAUTION  
Equipment Damage From Ultraviolet  
(UV) Lights!  
Trane does not recommend field installation of ultravio-  
let lights in its equipment for the intended purpose of im-  
proving indoor air quality. High intensity C-band ultravio-  
let light is known to severely damage polymer (plastic)  
materials and poses a personal safety risk to anyone  
exposed to the light without proper personal protective  
equipment. Polymer materials commonly found in HVAC  
equipment that may be susceptible include insulation on  
electrical wiring, fan belts, thermal insulation, various  
fasteners and bushings. Degradation of these materials  
can result in serious damage to the equipment.  
Trane accepts no responsibility for the performance or  
operation of our equipment in which ultraviolet devices  
were installed outside of theTrane factory or its  
approved suppliers.  
114  
115  
116  

Lexmark 43w User Manual
Lexmark 2200 User Manual
Mitsubishi Electronics Lossnay Lgh 25rx4 E User Manual
Samsung Aw1400a User Manual
Samsung Mh052fdea User Manual
Sanyo Cl2472 User Manual
Sharp Ar M236 User Manual
Soleus Air Sptac 09h User Manual
Suburban Mfg Regal Intensive Care Unit 12019 01 Ngfrep User Manual
Vinotemp Wm 2500ssh User Manual